CL1000SM

COLOR LASER COPIER 1000
SERVICE MANUAL
REVISION 1 MAY 1997
Canon
FY8-13E3-010
COPYRIGHT 1997 CANON INC. CANON CLC 1000 REV. 1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION -
I. FEATURES
1. Turns out as many as 30 copies per minute (both full-color and black-and white). The newly developed mechanism of four photosensitive drums processes 30 copies every minute. 2. SOOO-sheet large capacity paper source. The addition of two cassettes (holding 500 sheets each) and a paper deck (4000 sheets) offers a source ready to supply 5000 sheets of paper.
3. Automatic duplexing mechanism. The built-in duplexing unit enables automatic copying on both sides of sheets. 4. Paper of up to 209 g. Postcards and other materials of heavy stock may be used for copying. Various creative functions. In addition to such basic creative functions as editing of hue and brightness, installation of the ED Board Al provides such complex creative functions as framing, gradation, and freehand. Full line-up of options. A large number of options are designed for the CLClOOO, including the Preview Monitor, PDF, and IPU-II.
5.
6.
COPYRIGHT 0 1997 CANON INC.
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-l
External delivery roller Internal delivery roller No. 2 mirror mount Upper fixing web Scanning lamp Upper fixing roller Oil applying roller Lower fixing roller Pre-fixing feeding assembly Pre-separation/fixing charging assembly Image position correction CCD unit Lens Bk BD sensor CCD Bk image position correction mirror Bk No. 3 mirror C image position correction mirror C BD mirror C No. 3 mirror Internal static eliminating roller Polygon mirror/monitor M No. 3 mirror M BD sensor M image position correction mirror Y No. 3 mirror Y image position correction mirror Y BD mirror Registration roller Thick paper detection roller Multifeeder feeding roller Multifeeder pick-up roller Multifeeder tray Delivery vertical path roller Duplexing reversal inlet roller Lower fixing roller web Duplexing reversal feeding roller Duplexing reversal outlet roller Waste toner box Pre-duplexing feeding assembly Transfer belt Transfer cleaning blade Transfer belt cleaning web Cassette 2 Duplexing unit Polishing roller Oil removing roller Cassette 1 Pick-up roller Feeding roller Separation roller
Pick-up vertical path roller Paper deck separation roller Paper deck feeding roller Paper deck pick-up roller Pre-exposure lamp Pre-primary charging assembly Photosensitive drum cleaner SALT sensor Primary charging assembly Potential sensor Developing assembly Photosensitive drum Transfer charging assembly
CANON CLClLlOO REVlMAY1997 PRlNTEOINJAPAN(IhlPRIhlEAUJAPON)
l-13
- 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
C. Control Panel
Figure l-404
Key
@ Extended Copying Mode keys @ Message display @ Reset key
Description Press the appropriate key to select a specific copying mode. Indicates the selected copying mode or provides instructions. Press it to cancel the selected copying mode, thereby returning to standard mode. Press it to stop continuous copying. Press it to start pre-heating mode or to stop it. Press it to suspend on-going copying and to make a copy. Press it to start copying. Press it to change the copy count or settings. Press it to start ID mode. Press it to recall up to three previous copying modes.
Remarks
@I Stop key @ Pre-Heat key @ Interrupt key 0 Start key 8 Clear key @ ID key @ Call key
A press on the key starts ID mode, rejecting subsequent copying commands without input of an ID.
@I Pilot lamp
Glows green when power is turned on.

Table l-401
1-14
COPYRIGHT Q 1997 CANON INC.
1. GENERAL
DESCRIPTJON -
instructions to the User 1. When making two-sided copies in manual mode, it is important to correct the curling on the leading edge by reversing the direction of the curl. 2. The transfer medium may be any of the following five types: Plain paper: regular copy paper (80 to 105 g/m2) Thin paper: paper thinner than plain paper (64 to 79 g/m2) Thick paper: paper thicker than plain paper (106 to 163 g/m2) Extra thick paper: thicker than thick paper (164 to 209 g/m2) Transparency: transparency film Special paper 1: Paper identified as such on package Special paper 2: Paper identified as such on package 3. Points to Note about Transparencies Avoid contact with the copying side, by holding at the edge. Fan out each stack before setting it in a cassette or the multifeeder. Remove from the tray immediately after copying to avoid jamming. Keep unused transparencies in a box, and store them avoiding high temperature and humidity. 4. Points to Note about the Orientation of Transparencies Orient each transparency so that it is fed in the correct direction. When Placing in a Cassette, If vertical, orient it so that the white triangle at the corner is front left 0. If horizontal, orient it so that the white triangle at the corner is front right 0.
l l l
Placing on the Manual Feed Tray If vertical, orient it so that the white triangle is front right 0. If horizontal, orient it so that the white triangle is front left 0.
Figure l-406 5. Cassette Sheet In a high humidity environment, paper is likely to become moist and will adversely affect copying operation. If such is the case, advise the user to place the cassette sheet on the bottom of the cassette tray.
Figure l-405
l-15
I. IMAGE FORMATION
A. Outline
I-\I-...
Original exposure block Laser unit
Lens&CD
Fixina ass
t-l.._ II..:_ _
Separation chargiqc
( _ flG=__, Pre-faxing Transfer belt

-I I
rancfor halt dnzaninn umh
deck
8=
Pre-duplexing feeding
casseCassew'
1 Transfer blade
Transfer belt
Figure 2-101
COPYRIGHT 4 lM7 CANON INC.
CANON CCC1000 REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2-l
- 2. COPYING PROCESS
For each process color, the CLClOOO uses one set of components; i.e., photosensitive drum, developing assembly, cleaning unit. (In other words, four sets are used for full color reproduction.) The CLClOOOs photosensitive drum consists of a photo-conductive layer on the other side (OPC) and a conductive aluminum substrate on the inside. The CLClOOO differs from black-and-white copiers for the following: Light is shined on a color original, and the reflected light is separated by filters into the three primary colors of light for conversion by a CCD. Using analog video signals (RGB) from the CCD, video signals are generated for each process color (YMCK) to drive a semiconductor laser. A laser beam is directed to the appropriate photosensitive drum to develop the image representing the corresponding process color (of toner; complementary to the corresponding filter) for transfer to copy paper; the step is executed alike for Y, M, C, and K. The resulting image is fixed to the paper, producing a color copy of the original. The CLCl 000 uses four photosensitive drums for transfer of images to copy paper, and a transfer belt is used to ensure that copy paper is moved horizontally under each photosensitive drum for transfer
The image formation block consists of the following eight steps: Step 1 Pre-exposure Step 2 Primary charging Step 3 Laser exposure Step 4 Development Step 5 Retention/transfer Step 6 Separation Step 7 Fixing Step 8 Photosensitive drum cleaning Auxiliary processes include pre-primary charging, pre-fixing charging, and transfer belt cleaning/static elimination.
(___________________________..____
; Static Latent Image Formation Block 7 /
8. Drum cleaning
Figure 2-102
2-2
2. COPYING PROCESS -
B. Static Latent Image Formation Block

This block consists of three steps and ultimately leaves negative charges in the areas of the photosensitive drum representing the white (light) areas of the original, while neutralizing the charges in the areas representing the black (dark) areas of the original. Such an image created on the photosensitive drum using differences in potential is not visible to the human eye and is called a static latent image.
C. Pre-Exposure (step 1)
Photosensitive Time (t) -
Figure 2-l 04 In preparation for primary charging, the light from the pre-exposure lamp is directed to the surface of the photosensitive drum to remove residual charges, thereby preventing uneven copy density.
c-_..
_-____
Light area : (exposed to laser)

8
Dark area (white on original) , \ Pre-exposure Primary charging Image expose (step 1) (step 2) (step 3) Figure 2-103
COPYRlGHTQ1997
CANONINC.
CANONCLClOOOREV.1MAY1997
PRlNTEOINJAPAN(lMPRlME
AUJAPON)
2-3
D. Primary Charging (step 2)
E. Laser Exposure (step

Laser beam
3)
Dark area -
Light area
Figure 2-105 Figure 2-l 06 The negative corona of the primary charging assembly charges the surface of the photosensitive drum to a uniform negative potential, establishing primary potential. Since the surface potential of the charged photosensitive drum is determined by the potential of the grid, a bias is applied to the grid to ensure a specific drum surface potential. A laser beam of an intensity suited to the image density of the original is directed to the surface of the photosensitive drum, thereby neutralizing the charges on the surface. Such areas are called the light areas of the photosensitive drum and will later attract toner in step 4 (development).
2-4
2. COPYING PROCESS -
F. Development (step 4)
/ Blade Y / / Blade
Figure 2-l 08 Double blanking pulses and a DC bias (negative component) are applied to the developing cylinder to improve development efficiency and reproduction of highlighted areas, resulting in a developing bias with a larger negative than positive component. During copying, toner is attracted to the light areas of the photosensitive drum because of the drum surface potential and the negative potential of the developing bias, turning the latent static image into a visible image. Excess toner is then repelled by the photosensitive drum because of the drum surface potential and the positive component of the developing bias. The electrode plate under the developing cylinder is supplied with a high voltage (positive) to attract stray toner, thereby preventing soiling of the inside of the machine.
Stray-toner collecting electrode
Figure 2-107 The process in which the latent static image on the surface of the photosensitive drum is turned into a visible image is called development. Since the CL0000 is designed so that the areas on the surface of the photosensitive drum exposed to a laser beam will attract toner, the toner is charged to a negative potential (the same potential as in primary charging). As shown in Figure 2-107, the developing assembly consists of a developing cylinder and a magnetic blade. The developing cylinder in turn consists of a fixed magnet and a cylinder which rotates around the magnet. The developer is composed of toner (mainly resins and dye) and carrier (iron powder) mixed at a specific ratio. The toner and the carrier are charged to a negative and a positive potential, respectively, by friction against the rotating cylinder. The developer is held in the form of a brush over the surface of the cylinder within the magnetic field of the fixed magnet, and is deposited in a uniform layer by a blade.
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPAIME AU JAPON)
2-5
G. Retention/Transfer (step 5)
Conventional developing bias
Double blanking pulses
4uuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuu
----__ i --______.._ _ _..
---p-Eq
Transfer blade F /777 L Figure 2-110 The toner on the surface of the photosensitive drum is transferred to copy paper where the paper and the photosensitive drum come into contact. This is done by applying a high-voltage constant current through a blade and onto the back of copy paper (from behind the transfer belt). The CLClOOO uses the same transfer charges to retain copy paper on the transfer belt. For the first color (Y), transfer occurs at the same time as when the copy paper is drawn to the transfer belt by the work of transfer charges.
--ov _ __ _A
t
DC bias 12KHz 1 SKHz I
Figure 2-109
2-6
COPYRIGHTQ
1997 CANONINC.
CANONCLCIOOO REV.1 MAY1997 PRlNTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIME
AU JAPON)
2. COPYING PROCESS m
H. Separation (step 6)
Separation charging [I assembly
I. Fixing (step 7)
I r=l
COPY
paw
Oil applying roller
I ///
I ///
Figure 2-l 11 The CLClOOO separates copy paper from the transfer belt using the rigidity of copy paper (curvature separation). Since thin paper tends to have little rigidity, it can wrap around the transfer belt, failing to separate. To prevent such a problem, the separation charging assembly applies AC corona and DC bias, facilitating the separation of copy paper from the transfer belt.
Oil removing blade
Figure 2-112 Depending on the selected color mode, a maximum of four transfers takes place before the copy paper is forwarded to the fixing assembly. A pair of fixing rollers move the copy paper under pressure and heat, thereby melting the toner particles (of four colors) to produce as many colors as needed, reproducing the original images and fusing them into the fibers of the paper. To prevent adhesion of toner from copy paper to the surfaces of the fixing rollers (offset), the oil applying roller constantly supplies silicone oil to the rollers. The upper fixing roller is cleaned by a cleaning web, and the lower fixing roller is cleaned by a cleaning web and a cleaning blade.
CANON CLCIOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPAIME AU JAPON)
2-7
J. Photosensitive Drum Cleaning
Cleaning blade \-
sensitive
toer
F??$
feeding screw
Figure 2-l 13 In preparation for the next copying run, the cleaning blade scrapes off the residual toner from the surface of the drum. The collected toner is moved by the waste toner feeding screw to the rear of the copier and is collected in the waste toner case.
2-8
COPYRIGHT81997
CANONINC.
CANONCLClOOOREV.1 MAY1997 PRlNTEOINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
II. AUXILIARY PROCESS

A. Pre-Primary Charging
______ _ __ _,,~~zz~zz==zzz, --------__ II \I Preexposure t : $_ _-,,I I rlamp 111 $ 111 ~---_------~,, 1--r;,------7,-L_ II II II .a1
6. Pre-Fixing Charging
Photosensitive
Transfer belt Figure 2-202
Figure 2-201 To prevent drum memory caused by the positive charges of transfer, the CLClOOO executes pre-primary charging simultaneously with preexposure. Specifically, negative corona charges are applied to the photosensitive drum before primary charging to remove localized positive charges remaining on the photosensitive drum.
The toner on the copy paper after separation is more or less neutralized and yet is subject to change while the paper is forwarded. The CLClOOO causes its pre-fixing charging assembly to apply a negative DC bias immediately after separation of copy paper from the transfer belt to retain the toner on the copy paper, thereby preventing the toner from moving astray or causing offset during fixing.
COPYRIGHT (0 1997 CANON INC.
CANON CLClOW REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2-9
C. Grounding Roller
Figure 2-203 The potential on the transfer belt differs between areas in contactwith copy paper and areas not in contact. To maintain an even potential and, thereby, to increase the efficiency of cleaning performed in the next step, the belt is grounded by means of a grounding roller.
D. Static Eliminator
?=I=:
I
I
; __/
I
,:I, :
,
::I
I
\,._ I
1;
,(I. I \
\ .. \
\\
,I
_______I
__,
, -\\ \ ,\ .
13,
I
\;;-*
_-_____I
,I
I 0 I I
Figure 2-204 The transfer belt after separation of copy paper holds residual charges that occur during transfer. The static eliminator is used to remove* charges from the transfer belt preparing for retention and transfer for the next copying run. *Actually, by applying negative charges.
2-10
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTEO IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
E. Transfer Belt Cleaning
1 \
\ .\
. ..
.A
! Y\
.x
,/
.\.
/
/
cleaning blade
Transfer belt . cleaning web
Figure 2-205 See the table for a description and the main use of the cleaning mechanism used to clean the CLCl 000s transfer belt:
Transfer belt cleaning blade Transfer belt cleaning web Oil removing roller Polishing roller
Removes toner from the transfer belt during registration control. Removes oil from the transfer belt.
Removes oil from the transfer belt that builds up after two-sided copying. Roughens the surface of the transfer belt to prevent transfer of oil from the transfer belt to the photosensitive drum.
COPYRlGHTQ1997CANONINC.
CANONCLClDOO
REKlMAY1997 PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
2-11
I-
III. LIMITATIONS
A. Outline
There are many difficulties in making high quality color prints by an electrophotographic process, some of which are discussed below. The Color Laser Copier has many design features to minimize these difficulties, and they are very successful. However, the prints are not of the same quality as those in highquality printed material, such as magazine illustrations and photographs. Each product has its own advantages and limitations, and users of the copying machine should be made aware of the capabilities of the machine.
B. Characteristics
1. OPC
The sensitivity of the OPC used for the photosensitive drum is subject to the environment in which the machine is used and changes over time.
2. Reflectance of Toner
The ideal toners, representing the primary colors (yellow, magenta, and cyan), should absorb 100 percent of the spectrum of their complementary colors and reflect 100 percent of the rest. Such toners, however, are not available at present. .
3. Dry Electrostatic Photography and Gradation

As shown in Figure 2-301, it is impossible to reproduce the density of the original document exactly the same because of the characteristics of photosensitive material and toner. The powder toner, further, limits the details of the image to the diameter of its individual particles.
0.5
1.0
Document denslty (Do)
Figure 2-301
These limitations, however, have been solved to a point where they will not present appreciable problems by controlling the image processing by the scanner unit.
2-l 2
CANON CLClMJtl REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
II. SPECIFICATIONS
A. Type
Console Copyboard Light source Lens Image reading Photosensitive medium I Fixed Halogen lamp Lens array Photocells (BGR; 3-line CCD); CCD fixed, mirror scanning OPC drum (60 dia.) Table l-201 .
B. Mechanisms
Copying Charging Exposure Contrast adjustment Development Toner supply Pick-up Retention Transfer Separation Drum Cleaning Fixing indirect electrostatographic Corona Laser beam Automatic Toner projection (brush); development in Y, M, C, and Bk Manual (750 g of Y, M, and C; 640 g of Bk) 2 front cassettes (special), paper deck, multifeeder Static retention (concurrent with Y transfer) Blade (transfer belt) Static Blade Heat roller (700 W, upper; 500 W, lower) Table l-202
l-2
C. Performance
Type of original Maximum original size Reproduction ratio Sheet, 3-D object (2 kg max.) 11 xl 7 (279 mm x 432 mm) Direct (*0.5%), default (*l .O%; Table l-201). Zoom between 25% and 400% (*I .O%, in 1% increments), XY independent Zoom, AMS, XY-AMS, Zoom program 8 min or less 15.5 set or less (plain paper, AULTR) 19 set or less (Extra thick paper/transparency, AULTR) 18 set or less (Thick paper, AULTR) Up to 999 copies See Table l-207. Cassette Copy size (copy paper size)
Wait time (at 20C)
First copy time (A4/LTR) Continuous copying Copying speed
Max.: 1 lx17 (279 mm x 432 mm) Min.: STMT (216 mm x 139.5 mm) Max.: 297 mm x 432 mm Min.: Postcard (special) LTR (279 mm x 216 mm) Plain paper (60 to 105 g/m2), transparency (special), Thin paper (64 to 79 g/m*) Thin paper (64 to 79 S/m2), plain paper (80 to 105 g/m2), thick paper (106 to 163 g/m2; including cast coated paper, postcard), extra thick paper (164 to 209 g/m2; including cast coated paper, postcard), special papers 1 and 2, transparency (special) Plain paper (80 to 105 g/m2), transparency (special) Plain paper (105 g/m2; automatic two-sided/manual two-sided) Clawless, center reference, about 500 sheets of 81.4 g/m2 about 250 sheets of 81.4 g/m2 410 mm (stacking height; about 4000 sheets of 81.4 g/m2 paper) 250 sheets (approx.) One-sided Two-sided Leading edge: 2.5 mm k2.0 mm Left/right: 2.0 mm kl.5 mm Trailing edge: 2.5 mm 52.0 mm Two-sided Leading edge: 2.5 mm i2.0 mm (0.5 iO.5 mm in full image mode) Left/right: 2.0 mm *I .5 mm (0 kl .O mm in full image mode) Trailing edge: 2.5 mm k2.0 mm
Multifeeder Paper deck Cassette
COPY paper
type
Multifeeder
Paper deck Two-sided copying Cassette Multifeeder Paper deck Copy tray capacity
Image margin
Leading edge: 2.5 mm k1.5 mm Left/right: 2.0 mm *l .O mm Trailing edge: 2.5 mm k1.5 mm One-sided Leading edge: 2.5 mm kl.5 mm (0.5 kO.5 mm in full image mode) Left/right: 2.0 mm il .O mm (0 *l .O mm in full image mode) Trailing edge: 2.5 mm %1.5 mm 400 dpi 400 lpi
Non-image width
Wain scanning direction Sub scanning direction
Table l-203
1-3
Density adjustment Color mode Color adjustment Original mode Original detection Cassette selection Separation Auto two-sided copying Binding margin Frame erasing Shift Transparency interleaf One-touch adjustment Interrupt ID mode Auto start Auto clear Auto power-off Pre-heating Area selection/non-rectangular area selection Freehand selection Composition Image create Color create Specifications settings Standard mode change Mode memory Timer Density correction Jser node Auto gradation correction Background level adjustment Text/photo level Zoom fine adjustment Cleaning Transparency holder memory Thin paper source memory
Manual (9 steps), color AE, BE ACS, black, full-color Color balance, registration, hue/brightness adjustment, density range adjustment Text/printed photo, text/halide photo, text, printed photo, halide photo, map Size, position Auto paper selection, auto cassette change Page separation, free division, enlargement separation, reduced page composition (w/ RDF), two-sided separation (w/ RDF) , One-sided to two-sided, two-sided to two-sided (w/ RDF), two-sided to one-sided (w/ RDF), page separation two-sided Provided (right/left binding; margin adjustment) Original, book, sheet Center, corner, selection Provided Provided Provided Provided Provided Provided (Pmin standard; may be changed or disabled in user mode) Provided (2-hr standard; may be varied or disabled in user mode) Provided Provided (w/ ED Board Al) Provided (w/ editor) Provided (w/ ED Board Al) Provided (some functions w/ ED Board Al) Provided (some functions w/ ED Board Al) Provided Memory/Initialization 9 modes; 3 in full set, 6 in non-area Auto clear time, auto power-off time Provided Provided Provided Adjustment of text/photo separation (7 steps) Provided Provided Provided Provided
Table l-203
1-4
D. Others
Operating environment For temperature, see Figure 5-1 in Chapter 5. For humidity, see Figure 5-l in Chapter 5. (atmosphere between 0.8 to 1 .O atm; 810.6 hPa and 1013.3 hpa) Power supply 2oov 230V Power supply (rated value *lo%) 240V Serial number LFH NFH (UL) SFH (FRN) TFH (GER) UFH (AMS) PFH QFH (UK) RFH (CA)
Power consumption
Copying: Standby:
3 kW or less (approx.; A4, full color, continuous) 0.62 kW/h (approx.; reference only) Sound power level by IS0 (1 m from machine)
Noise Ozone Paper Consumables Toner Fixing oil Dimensions
73 dB (copying) 64 dB (standby)
0.02 ppm or less (average over 8 hr) Keep wrapped and protect against humidity. Avoid direct rays of the sun; keep at 40C or less. Avoid direct rays of the sun. See Figure l-201. 458.2 kg (body only) Copyboard (3.7 kg) Editor (4.9 kg) Paper Deck (25.5 kg) Table l-205
Weight
730mm 820mm
b- 1384mm 4
(w/ projector)
(w/ sorter) Height 1000 mm (w/ copyboard cover) 1172 mm (w/ RDF-El) 1422 mm (w/ projector) Figure l-201
COPYRIGHT Q 1997 CANON INC. CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
l-5
Model
Reduction
0.250 B4+A3 B5R + A4R B5 + A4 A4R + 84 A5 + B5 A4R + A3 B5R + 84 A5+A3 _
Enlargement
1.153
A3+A5 A3 + B5
0.500 0.611
1.223 1.414 2.000 4.000 -
Japanese
6R5E
A3 + A4R 84 + B5R B4 + A4R A3 + 84
0.707 0.815 0.865
North American
Table l-206
l-6
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME
AU JAPON)
Copying speed Source Side Paper type Shine A4RRTR A3f 279mm x 432mm (1lx 17) 6 12 4
, 4
A4FUB4
Matte Cassette One-sided Plain paper Standard Glossy OHP Standard Matte Paper deck One-sided
Plain paper Standard Gloss Duplexing 2nd side Plain paper Standard Glossy Standard Plain paper Glossy Multifeeder One-sided/ 2nd side Extra thick paper Thick paper Transparency Standard Glossy Standard Glossy Standard
15 31 9 6 15
31 9 21 9 21 9 9 6 6 6 6
9 18 6 4
9 4 9 4 4 4 4 4 4
12 6 12 6 6 4 4 4 4
Table l-207 Copying Speed (copies/minute)
Specifications subject to change without notice.
> ,< _ Reference: The CLChO&I hi&;; f&q &eeci to a
specific standard to produce the degree of shine selected by the us&. A higher fixing speed decreases the shin;, producing a matte effect. On !he other hand, a lower fixing speed increases the shine, producing a glossy effect.
l-7
III. LASER AND SAFETY MEASURES

A. DHHS
The CLClOOO has been approved as Class 1 equipment under the Radiation Performance Standards of the Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS), established in the U.S.A. in 1968. The approval represents that the product has shown to be free of harmful laser beams; the optical system of the product is designed such that the laser beams are confined in a protective housing and cannot escape the product while in use.
B. CDRH
On August 2,1976, the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the Food and Drug Administration of the U.S.A. put an act in force to deal with laser devices. Under the act, laser devices manufactured on and after August 1,1976, may not be marketed in the United States without approval. Figure l-302 shows the label which serves as proof of approval under the- act; the label is required to be attached to all laser devices marketed in the U.S.A.
CANON
30-2, SHIMOMARUKO, 3_CHOME, OHTAKU, TOKYO,
146,JAPAN.
MANUFACTURED:
THlSPRODUCTCONFOFiMSWlTHCQRHRADlATlON PERFORMANCESTANDARDPlCFRCHAPTERl SUBCHAPTERJ.
Figure l-302
Figure l-301
l-8
COPYAIOHT Q 1997 CANON INC.
CANON CLCl999 REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
C. Points to Note When Handling the Laser Unit

When servicing the optical unit of the product, take adequate care not to interrupt the laser path with a tool having a high reflectance. As a rule, remove the watch, rings, or the like before work; such items tend to reflect the beam and damage the eyes.
Remain alert when servicing inside the covers on which the label is attached. The machine is equipped with a shutter which blocks out the laser beam when the front left door is opened; therefore, when images are checked with the front left door open, the shutter needs to be held open using a door switch actuator. Keep these in mind when such work is necessary.
f CAmoN- LASER RAC4ATlON WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. /$F- RAYONNEMENT LASER EN CAS WOUVWTUfE. EXPOSiXlN DANGEREUSE AU FALSCEAU. m- LASERSTRAHLUNG. WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET. NIGHT DEM STRAHL AUSSl3ZEN. - RAMACKIN LASER CUANDO SE ABRE. EVKAFI EXFONERSE AL RAYO. - RADIAZIONE LASER IN CASO DI APERTURA. EVKARE LE WOSKIONE AL FASCIO. - AVAITAESSA OLET ALlllNA LASERShElL~ ALhATS SATEESEEN. - IASERSTRALNING NAR MNNA DEL A R &WAD. BETRAKTA EJ STRAW. wm - LASER STRthUNG. NAR DENNE ER h3. UNDGA BESTRhNG. \ .&t#M - LASERSTRhJNG NAR LIEKSEL bNES. UNNGh EKSPONERING FOR STRkEN.
Figure l-303
l-9
IV. NAMES OF PARTS

A. External View
(j) @ @ @ @ @
Original tray Control panel Editor (option) Hopper cover (toner supply opening) Multifeeder Paper deck (option in Japan) Figure l-401
0 @ @ @ 0 G3
Control key/power switch Front right door Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Front left door Copy tray
l-10
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN
(IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1. GENERAL DESCRlPllON -
@ Fixing assembly knob 0 Copy counter @ Front door switch @ Hopper assembly 0 Transfer unit @ Duplexing unit
0 Pre-duplexing feeding assembly @I Waste toner box @I Fixing/delivery/reversing unit @ Fixing oil bottle @I Document holder
Figure l-402
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PAINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
l-11
= 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
B. Cross Section
\ \
-_ --
r--
Figure l-403
1-12
COPYRIGHT81997 CANON INC.
CANONCLCIOOO
REV.lMAY1997
PRlNTEDINJAPAN(IMPAIMEAUJAPON)
I. BASIC MECHANISMS
A. Functional Construction
The CLClOOO consists of six functional blocks: pick-up/feeding, original exposure, image processing, laser exposure, image formation, and control.
AControl block)--
Reader controller PCB Analog processor PCX
jD C controller PCB j
-.l-
Amage formation Mock)/
Transfer belt cleaning t re-fixing fwdln Holding tray Upper cassette
Figure 3-101
COPYRlQHTQ1997 CANON INC.
CANONCLClOWREV.lMAY1997 PRINTED INJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
3-l
- 3. OPERATIONS AND TIMING
B. Outline of Electrical Circuitry

The CLClOOOs major electrical mechanisms are controlled by the microprocessor mounted on the reader controller PCB and the DC controller PCB. The controller PCB and the DC controller PCB each are equipped with a lithium battery to back up important data.
IP memory PCB
I Interface motherboard
IP EC0 PCB ED board Preview Monitor Boe,rd/~or
Image processor PCB
t Interlace Board
Scanner motor driver PCB
Reader controller PCB
Lamp regulator
Control panel CCF. Projector, Editor, DF. Copy Data Controller
AC drtver PCB Potential meawrement PCB
!-I 4l
CPU a2324
u
RAM
a2342 a2343 /7;
SALT 000, PCB
ROM a2340
a2341
+izziij
IPC a2325 ii
Ssnsor. swttdl Flting motor Drum motor Developing motor
HotdIng tray motor Plcbup motor
Laser scanner motor. Laser 8canrmr motor driver PCB -
Motor, Fan. Clutch Solenoid
Pm-exposure lamp
Flgun, 3-102
3-2
CANON CLClWO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3. OPERATIONS AND TlMlNG -
C. Inputs to and Outputs from Major PCBs

Inputs to and Outputs from the Reader Controller PCB (l/3)
-_
J 2001 ~?+zzzq J 2501 J 2503 J 2502 Reader controller PCB
3 Image processor PCB
J 1453
J1308 IP memory PCB Check in the field not possible. ED board
J 1431
J 1806
J2110
\ < . <
We0 controller r PCB

c
See Chapter 3. (laser exposure system)
J 3251BK
I.
Figure 3-103
3-3
Inputs to and Outputs from the Reader Controller PC6 (2/3)

?
Scanner motor driver PCB
-I
Reader controller PCS
Scanner motor
See Chapter 3. (original exposure system)
1602A Scanner motor home position sensor When scanner (No. 1 mirror mount) is at home position, 1. n See Chapter 3. (original exposure system) J 1306A
124V Scanner assembly cooling fan 1 When 6, FMlO/ll turns ON.
Scanner assambly cooling fan 2 j 24V Scanner assembly cooling fan 3 i 24V Scanner assembly cooling fan 4
@+,3D* $%ksON.
See Chapter 3. (orfglnal exposure system)
TP6
J 1305A
Figure 3-104
COPYRIQHT Q 1997 CANON INC.
CANON CCC1000 REV.1 MAY lQ97 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3. OPERATIONS AND TIMING -
Inputs to and Outputs from the Reader Controller PCB (313)

-_
Reader controtler PCB J 6251 Control panel relay PCB
3
J 6253 J 6258 J J J J 6252 6256 6259 6260 J 6261 J 6262 Keypad PCS , LCD/touch panel
J 1302
See Chapter 3. (control panel)
DC contrdler PCS J 1307 . J6244 To Copy Data Controller Al J 6245 J 13068 Copy Data Controller Al PCS
Serial communicationl IPC communication
Bee the Servke Manuel lor the Copy Data Controller Al.
1
cc-v
J6257-2 -3 -4 -1
J1304-2 -3 -4 -1
5V -+ When 0 CCV-V turns ON :CD :CDr When c&d Is Inwrted, 0:
To editor <Y> J 13058
See Chapter 3. (u&or)
To projector J 1305A
see the sefvke Manual

lor the projector.
To RF-El <x> J 13068
See the Servke Manual lor the RF-El.
Figure 3-105
3-5
= 3. OPERATIONS AND TIMING
Inputs to the DC Controller (l/8)

~.
J6055 J 2952 r&----l DC controller PCB
Paper thickness sensor I I
PTHLED PTHDTl PTHDT2
See Chapter 3. (pick-up feeding system) r
1747
Multifeeder refay PC0
.-
Registration paper sensor
J6C56 -3 -2
J 2953A -1 -2
F-1 ;
5v J 2955A -3 J 22071 ;I: PS,DT When copy paper is at PSl, 1. (when fight-blocking plate is at PSl)
J6062 Muftifeeder lifter sensor (upper)
J295381
I PS2DT When muftifeeder lifter is up, 1. (when light-blocking plate is at PS2)
Muftifeeder lifter sensor (lower)
ps3DT
When multifeeder fiier is down, 1. (when light-bfocking pfate Is at PS3)
Muftifeeder paper sensor (front)
PS4DT
When copy paper is at PS4. 1. (when light-blocking plate Is at PS4)
J6C66 Multifeeder paper sensor (rear)
J2954
51
I
J 22078 - 13 DS5DT When copy paper is at 1. (when light-blocking plate Is at PS5)
MuMfeeder relay PCB
J 6076
-1
5v J 22148 - 3 -2 -1 f When copy paper Is at PSB. 1. (when light-blocking plate Is at PSB)
Holding tray front feeding sensor 1
psa
-2 -3
I--
SeDT
Hdding tray front feeding sensor 2
PS.9
J 6077 -1 -2 -3
5v J 22148 - 6 1 -5 ff>SQDT -4 When copy paper Is at PS9, 1. (when tiiht-blocking plate Ls at PSQ)
II
Figure 3-106
CANON CLCIOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAFGN)
Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (2/8)

DC controller PCB 5V Transfer belt cleaning web rotation sensor J6OQ2-1 -2 PSI0 -3 T 1 J 2216A - 2 -7 -3 f PSIODT sh Altsmatesbetwsn1and1)wMe bansfsr belt cleanii web ddvs llutol is rotating.
J6OQ3-1 Transfer belt cleaning web length sensor PSI1 -2 -3 J6OQ4-1 Transfer belt lifter sensor 1 -2 PS12 -3
ID -6 1) 0 . 1) PSllDT
Whsn
hgth of ban&r bslt dsaning web falls bslow sp&hz vsius. 1. (kght-blocking plats is at PSl 1)
-5 PSlPDT
when Iii of tran!& bslt is up, 1.

(cut-off in light+!ccldng plats 01 kfter up/down drive csm is at PS12)
Transfer belt lifter sensor 2
-6 PS13 -3 I)
PSI 3DT
When transfer Ml Mter is dorm 1. (cut-off in iight#o.%ing plats of ktsr up/down drive UL(II is at PSt3)
Post-registration paper sensor
PS14DT
Whsn copy pspsr is at PS14. 1. (when kght-blccldng plate is at PS14)
Separation sensor
PS15DT
When copy paper is at PS15. 1. (when l@t-Mock@ @ate is at PSlS)
5v
Transfer belt home position sensor
m J-,:o7-
J61OQ-1 -2 PS16 -3 J6110-1
J2219A-7 r J 22198 - 1
f PS16DT %-
Wh+ntransferlMhwwpcMonts detected, 1. (refiscBng stkksr w1 transfer bell is at P616)
Transfer edge sensor 1 (front)
PS17DT
Whensdgsdstsclbnlsvsr(front)d trMsferbeltLsstP6i7 * 1 .
Transfer edge sensor 2 (rear)
PSlBDT
VWnedQsdstscMkwsr(rsar)of trawfer telt I8 II PS18 1
Transfer belt edge sensor 3 (front)
PSlQ
-2 _3
PSlQDT
detection lever (hont) 01 trsnsfsr belt is sl PSlB. 1.

When edge
Transfer belt edge sensor 4 (rear)
PS2ODT
Figure 3-107
3-7

-_
DC controller PCS J 6124 Pick-up vertical path 1 sensor J 566QA -12 -11 -10 5V
15503 9
J 2 2 2 2 PS 21 DT WhenmpypaparkatP621.1. (when &thModrtng plats b at ps2i)
PS21
Paper deck connectttn sensor
if6126 I; -1 -2 -3
5V -6 -7 9
6
PS 22DT
wnplckupdccforpapxdedtis
ckad, I. (when li@twihg stats is at P322)
cassette 1 psper sensor
PS 23DT
whenC0pypeperkthlXWttsl,1. (when ttght-t&king ptata is at PS23)
Cassette 1 litter sensor
PS 24DT
When caaaatte 1 liner is up. 1. (tin light-Whg ptats is at P324)
Pick-up verttcsl path 2 sensor
-z
PS 25DT
When copy papsr is at PS25. 1. (whan t@ht-hkditq pate ia at PS25)
Pick-up verttcsl path 3 sensor
-1;
PS 26DT
When copy papar b at P327, I. (when light%dring ptata is at PSX)
cassette 2 litter sensor
-1g
PS 27DT
Cassette 2 paper sensor
?I 26DT
Whsnpap3kkcawk32.Y (tin ~hthbckhq ptata k at PS25)
5V
L. I
Duplexlng stacking gukb hOme position sensor PS29
J6166-1 -2 -3
J2224S-; -e -9
f PS 29DT YL IV
wtm copy paplr h at Ps29. 1.

(when tbht-Mocklog phts ta at P329)
Holding trsy paper sensor 1
J6172-1 -2 PS30 -3
J2224A
-4
-5 -5
f
wlen wpy ppsf k 11
PSW. 1.
PS 30DT ;h
(whsn tQht&ckbg phb e at PX@)
Figure 3-108
COPYRIOHT 0 1997 CANON INC.
Holding tray paper sensor 2
Delivery vertiil path sensor 2
PS32
J6201 -1 -2 -3 J6202-1 -2 -3 J6263-1 -2 0 0
J22llA-1 -9 _2
PS32DT h
whencccypspsrbatP632,l. (when~l-MocldngptabbetFS32)
Duptexing reversal sensor
- 10
PS33
when ccfy paper b at PS33, I. PS 33DT (when~twngptstsbatPS33)
Delivery sensor PS34
-11
-3 J6207-1 - 2. -3 J2211B-2 -5 -3
PS34DT 5V )
vmsn~psperbstP634,l. (~kMhfrxwwtebstps3o
Internal delivery sensor
PS35
PS 35DT
whmccpypapwbstP635.1. (when @ht-Mockxy @ata b at P635)
Upper fixing web fength sensor
PS36
J6013-1 -2 -3
J2209A-1 -2 -14
5V +
PS36DT
Delivery vertiil path sensor 1
PS36 I
J 6273 - 1 -2 -3
5v J22llB-9 + wlwlcqyp@3rbstP636.1. -6 PS 36DT (when lightwng plate b at PS8) -7
Shutter closed sensor
When shuller
closea. '1'.
Shutter open sensor
when ahutler o,Xm,
'1'.
Paper deck paperahsentwnsor
Paper deck Inter posftlon sensor Paper deck upper llmlt switch Papar deck tower limit swttch Paper deck door open/closed sensor
whmpgadeckdoorbdoee4.0
Cassette 1 paper terqth sensor unft
Figure 3-109
COPYRlOHT81997
CANONINC.
CANONCLCIOOO REV.1 MAY1997 PRlNTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIME
AUJAPON)
3-9
I--DC
Cassette 2 paper length sensor unit
controller PCB Detects length of copy paper based on combination of various input signals.
Multifeeder paper width sensor
/( Multifee? relay PCB _I - J6161U-1 -2 -3 . J616lL-1 -2 J 22268 -1 -11
1
Detects width of copy paper in association with multifeeder and side guide plate of each cassette, (analog signal)
Cassette 1 paper width sensor
Cassette 2 paper width sensor
I
6xxx-3J2Q53Ar-5~
J 22268 -1 I -1: -1:
J 220iA _,$ OHPLEO Transparency sensor OHPSDT
When o, transparency sensor LED turns ON. (output signal)
When 0. transparency leading edge detected.
Y toner level sensor (upper)

M toner level sensor (upper)
TS 1
J-3_ -2 -1
J34OlA1 t -2MEPU -3
5v
J22OQB-1
TSSLCT
When TSSLCT is l, selects TSl , 2, 3. 6. When TSSLCT is o, selects TS4, 5. 6, 7.
C toner level sensor (upper) Bk toner level sensor (Uppe!) Enor sensor tar Y hopper Error sensor for M hopper Error sensor for C hopper Bk loner level sensor (lower)
-2 -1 TS2 F 56332-3 J6334-3 -2 TS3 _, 563363 1:
TS4
0 0 0
1
J?4Olb2
. I
AM,,
CTFPU .
1
-6 <I KTEPU
c
I.
I i
522098-l J22OQB-1
I YTEP
MTEP 0 when toner falls short of speclflc value based on comblnatlon wlth TSSLCT.
522098-l; CTEP J22OQB-1: KTEP
I'
i
t
mj1 YTEPL*I /_3401~5~
TSB
J6337-3 -2 -1
1 -
tlopper relay F CB
-_
.m
Figure 3-l 10
3-10
COPYRlOHT 0 1897 CANON INC.
CANON CLClOW REV.1 MAY 1897 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPOW
3. OPERATIONS AND TIMING m
Inputs to the DC Controller PC6 (6/8)
Front door switch
J6003F-1 -2
J 22128 - 14 15 FRDC 51,
-DC controller PCB When front door is dosed, 0.
Control key switch
SW3
J 22398 -1 - 2 , KEYSW When key switch is inserted, 0.
-27
Waste toner lock detection switch
SW4
J 22238 - 10 When waste toner clogging is 11 W-TBDP detected, 0. 4-& J 22238 - 12 When fixing assembly knob is 13 F-KBLK set, 0. d -;1, J2953A - IO -9 B J 29558 J 220i 1 4 - 12
Fixing lever switch
SW5
Muftifeeder open switch
SW6
!* -_1 Multifeeder relay PCB
-I
MFDDC When multifeeder is closed. 0.
Y potential measurement PCB J 6255Y J 6223 I-4 J 6220Y J 2216, 24V f Potential sensor (Y) EPC-Y ;h Check in the field not possible
-_ M potential measurement PCB J 6255M J 6223h, -A -1
J 22161
24V f EPC-M Check in the field not possible. %
Potential sensor (M)
I-1
-. Figure 3-111
3-l 1
rPotential sensor (C)
-C potential measurement PCB
I-
r
,
DC controller PCB
Check in the field not possible.
rI
Bk potential measurement sensor J 6220K -4 I I - - 2-
J 2216,
11;
EPC-K -A
Potential sensor (K) I
-1 -
Check in the field not possible.
Multifeeder relay PCB
-1 - _-I J 22078-l
Environment sensor
EVI
-1 3 l4 -6 -2
-9 -7 J 6224Y- 6 -4 -6
J&5586 -7 -0 -10
EVRMT EVHUM EVTEMP 51,
Check In the field not possible.
J6OfBY
Figure 3-112
3-12
CANON CLClQOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTEO IN JAPAN (IMPAIME AU JAPON)

DC controller PCB
SALT sensor(Y)
SALT sensor (M) See Chapter 3. (image formation) SALT sensor (C) J 2226E
SALT sensor(K) J 22268
Color toner density sensor (Y)
J 2229A Color toner density sensor (C) j-1 E J 22298
See Chapter 3. (image formation)
J 2209A -12 Fixing oil level sensor PS6 -13 -14
5 ;V f OEP 71, See Chapter 3. (feeding system)
J 22068 Polygon scanner assembly thermistor
- 8 4 -!
f THM3 %
E1
J29olF CCD front PCB for pattern reading J 2653F Image poaltlon correction PCB (front)
J 2651 F
See Chapter 3. (laser exposum)
LED front PCB for pattern reading
J 2203
J 2651R
See Chapter 3. (Iaaer ewoaum) J 2951 R LED rear PC9 for pattern reading J 2204 J 2654R
.Figure 3-113
COPYRlCiHTQ1997CANONINC.
CANONCLClOOOREV.lMAYlWI7
PRlNTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
3-13
Outputs from the DC Controller PC6 (l/12)
r-
DC controller PCB Wfh AC input path l, from outlet; I, through power-saving switch, When input from outlet is detected, 1.
--
J23S4-5 1 PWSLCT
[I* When 0. main switch turns OFF. When fixing lever is set. 0.
THMf (input signal)
5v t
cK input for drum beater/cassette > t treater

signal)
AC driver PCS From
t signal)
.
THM7 LUii& Holding fray heater $802 J 22t+ I CSTHD . C drum heater
sfgnal)
1
_I
When 1. cssssffe fwaterlPapsr deck heater tums ON When 1. C drum healer twns ON.
KDRHD Wfwn '1'. Bk drum he&r tums ON. L_-zf MDRHD When 1. M drum healer turns ON. YDRHD When 1. Y drum heater turns ON. wfrsn 1. M9rJ turns ON. A-p 33 TERR-L When shortckcuit b detecfed in bwer fbfng heswrtrbc, I. (fnput dgnrl) Paper deck heater ~____________________-___
I
TERR-U When sfwrtcircuk b detected in upper fblng heater trbc. 0. (fqnrt signsI) When 0. upper fbing heater tums Oh when 0. lower rffng heatsr fums ON
Fixing Lower web drive motor @-
Figure 3-l 14
3-14
COPYRlGHTQ1997
CANONINC.
CANONCLClOOO REV.1 MAY1997 PRlNTEOINJAPAN(IMPRlMEAU
JAPON)
Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (2/12)

DC controller PCB
24V Fixing oil pump drive solenoid
r-l
J6014-I SL2 -2
J2209A-3 -4
_-+ SL2D 24V When I, SL2 turns ON.
Upper fixing web take-up solenotd
SL 3
FTS FT6
J2209A-5 -6
-+ SWD When 0. SL3 turns ON.
Upper fixing web release solenoid
J6615-1 SL4D When It, SL4 turns ON.
Multtteeder pick-up release solenoid Muftiieeder relay PCB
SLBD
When 0, SL5 turns ON.
Transfer cleaning blade solenoid
SLGDS When 0. SLGDS turns ON. (transfer cleaning blade comes into contact with transfer belt) SLGDR When 0. SLGDR turns ON. (transfer cleaning blade leaves transfer belt)
Y transfer Made
SLNDS When 6, SLNDS turns ON. (transfer blade comes into contact wfth transfer belt) SL7YDR When 0. SL7YDR turns ON. (transfer blade leaves transfer heft)
M transfer bfade sole&d
SL7MDS When W, SL7MDS turns ON. (transfer blade comes Into contact wfth transfer belt) SLIMDR When 0. SLlMDR turns ON. (transfer blade feaves transler baft)
C transfer blade solenokl
SL7CD.S When o, SL7CDS turns ON. (transfer bfada comes into contact wtth transfer belt) SLICDR When 6, SL7CDR turns ON. (transler blade leaves transfer bek)
I
Bk transfer blade solenoid p- J6104-1 SL70k -2 -3
J 2220- f
SL7KDS When 0. SLIBDS turns ON. (transfer blade comes InlO contact wtth transfer bell) SL7KDR When O, SL7BDR IUrrU ON. (transfer blade leaves transfer belt)
Figure 3-115
3-15
Outputs from the DC Controller (3/12)
Duplexing pick-up roller releasing solenoid
J 6132 -2 O SL6 r - J J 6136 -9, 24V -10
J 2222A -3 SL6D When 9, SL8 turns ON.
Cassette 1 pick-up roller releasing solenoid
SL9 -t or-T2 J6105 J559lB 2 4 V
SLSD
When I, SL9 turns ON.
Cassette 2 pick-up roller releasing

IF] -I SLIOD _y Pick-up assembly relay PCB 7 24V Duplexing paper deflecting plate solenoid (S) WhenO,SLlOtumsON,
SLt 1SD When 0. SLI IS turns ON.
Duplexing paper deflecting plate solenoid (R)
lmm
SLttRD
WhenO,SLllMtumsON.
Duplexing paper deflecting plate solenoid (L)
II----l
SLIIL
J 6171 - 2 -1 - 13 SLt 1LD When 9, SLI IL turns ON.
24V
Stopper plate solenoid
-7
Paper feeding roller sofenold J6175-2 SLf3 -1 U - - - - - l J2224A-14 -13 Delivery paper deflecting plate sofenold J6296-2 SLl4 01 J6296-2 Separation claw releasing solenoid 01 SL15 -1 ,v -6 -1 v J22llB-1 -4
SLIPDR
When 0. SLIPDR turns ON. (stopper plate shffts down)
24V t
SLtSD When Y), SL13 turns ON.
24V f SLl4D When 0. SL13 turnr ON.
SLISD
When 0. SL13 turns ON
Reglstratlon releasing sohoM
Figure 3-116
3-16

~_
DC controller PCB
SALT sensor shutter open/close solenoid for Y
24V ___ J6310-3 -2 SLlN _, J2212A - 3 -2 _f SLl7YDO WhenO. SLlNDC turns ON. (shutter opens) SL17YDC When o, SLINDC turns ON. (shutter closes) 24V 3 SL17MDO When I, SL17MDO turns ON. (shutter opens) SL17MDC When 6, SLIlMDC turns ON. (shutter closes) 24V
-1
SALT sensor shutter openlcbse solenoid for M
~ J6311-3 -2 SL17M _,
I
J2212A - 6 -5
-*
SALT sensor shutter open/close solenoid for C
J2212A-9 ~ J6312-3 1 f -a -2 SLl7CDoWhen 6, SL17CDO turns ON. SL17C _, (shutter opens)

-7
SLl7CDC When I, SLl7CDC turns ON. (shutter closes) 24V f SLl7KW WhenO, SL17BDC turns ON. (shutter opens) SLIIKVDC When o, SL17BDC turns ON. (shutter closes)
SALT sensor shutter open/close solenoid for Bk
Polishing roller solenoid
m----l
sLl8 SLaGw
J6315-2 -I J22186 -10 SLIBD 24V FT8001 Fraoo2 J 2223A - 1 -6 f PRSD 24v When I, SLeoOl turns ON. When 0. SL18 turns ON.
Paper deck pick-up roller releasing solenoid
Y toner supply clutch
J 22098 - 1 -3
f CLlD When 0. CL1 turns ON.
M toner supply clutch
CL2D
When 0. CL2 turns ON.
C toner suppiy ckrtch
CL3D
When I, CL~ turns ON.
Bk toner supply clutch (upper)
CL4D
When I, CL~ turns ON.
Bk toner suppty clutch (lower)
CLSD
When o, CL~ turns ON.
Figun, 3-l 17
COPYRIGHT@1997 CANON INC.
CANONCLClOOOREV.lMAY1997
PRlNTEOINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
3-17

r-24V t DC controller PCB J 2955A -14 J2207, -:
J 2951 Multifeeder pick-up clutch -3 -4
3 I
CLGD
When o, CL6 turns ON.
Paper thickness detection roller clutch
CL7D
When I, CL7 turns ON.
Registration roller ctutch CL6D Multiieeder relay PCB I_
When 6, CL6 turns ON,
_I
Duplexing unit pick-up roller clutch
3LlOD
When 6, CL10 turns ON.
Pick-up vertical path roller 1 clutch
3Lll D
When 6, CL1 1 turns ON.
Cassette 1 pick-up clutch >Ll2D J556lB 2 4 V -1 f -2 When I. CL12 turns ON.
J 5502 -3
J 2222P - IC
:L13D
When 6, CL13 turns ON.
Cassette 3 pi&-up clutch
J 6141 -2
J556lB 2 4 V -7 f
J 5503
J 2222E3
Ll SLl4D
1 24V Reversal drive clutch J2223B- 14
. I5
J 2226A - 4
CLlGD 24V
Transfer belt litter clutch
CL17D
When 0. CL1 7 turns ON.
Figure 3-118
3-l 8
3. OPERATIONS AND THING m

DCcontrolfer PCB 24V J2223A- 11 - 13,
Paper deck feeding clutch
STFCD
-12,
STPCD
Delivery assembly cooling fan 1
Delivery assembly cooling fan 2
When FM_D=O. FM_PD=l, high-speed rotation. When FM_D=O, FM_PD=O, low-speed rotation. 24V f FMBD FM3SPD
J2212B-4 Delivery assembly cooling fan 3 -5 -6
Laser cooling fan (front)
When 0. FM4 turns ON
Laser cooling fan (rear)
FMSD 24V
When o, FM5 turns ON.
J 2233 - 1 Primary exhaust fan - 2 FMGD 24V + When 0. FM7 turns ON. 24V J2215B-1 Prfmary suction fan (left) j When o, FM8 turns ON. When o, FM6 turns ON.
J2214A-1 Pre-fixing feeding fan
- 2 ( FM8D
24V J 22158 - 3
Prlmary suctlon fan (right)
. 4; FM9D
When 0. FM9 turns ON.
Dellvery lower cooling fan 1 24V -11 Dellvery lower cooling fan 2 -12 FM2OD
Figure 3-119
3-19

/
r24V -3 24V
DC controller PCB
Multifeeder lifter motor lifter moves down.
J6029-5
J 2206A- 2
Image posttion correction mirror slant correction motor for Y
M2_A
- 4 MZ-B - 6 -M2_6*
Alternates between 1 and 0 while M2 is rotating.
J6031Image position correction mirror reproduction ratio correction motor for Y
J2206k6 -11 -7 -6 -10 - 12 M3-A M3-A M3-B M3_2 Alternates between 1 and 0 while M3 is rotating.
Laser scanner motor
See Chapter 3. (laser exposure) 24V
Image position correction mirror slant correction motor for C
-4 -6
M5-B M5-B 24V
Alternates between 1 and 0 while M5 is rotating.
J221 OA- 6 11 -7 Image position correctlon mirror reproductfon ratlo correction motor for Y
-0
- 10 - 12
M6-A ~6.A M6-B M6_B
Alternates between 1 and Y) while M6 ls rotating.
Image pcsltlon correctlon mirror slant correction motor for Bk
Alternates between 1 and 0 while M7 Is rotating.
Image position correction mirror reproduction correctton motor for Bk
Alternates between 1 and Kl whlfs M6 Is rotating
Figure 3-120
3-20

DC controller PCB
Fixing motor 5v f hMOPLL hMOD
See Chapter 3. (pick-up/feeding system)
Pick-up motor
t
;h
When error is detected while Ml0 is rotating, 1. When 0. Ml0 rotates.
24V J6074 - 5 -2 -6 -4 -3 ., J2214A- 4 -7 -3 -5 -6 -R
f Ill-A dll-A 411-B All-0 24V While Ml 1 is rotating, alternates between 1 and 0.
Prefixing feeding motor
J2216A-1 Transfer heft cleaning web moor
f M12D 4v 3 When 0. Ml2 rotates.
Transfer heft swing motor
413-A Ml3-A Ml3-B H13-B J6112 J3203 J3202 J221QB M14D M14PLs ;h Transfer belt motor I
While Ml 1 is rotating, alternates between 1 and 0.
Transfer heft motor
sea chapter 3. (pkk-UpneedIng system)
Poll.shlng/oll removlng motor
M150N MlSPLL MlSDlR ;h
See Chapter 3. (pfck-upfeedlng system)
1-.
Figure 3-121
COPYRlQHTQ1997CANONINC.
CANONCLClOOOREV.1MAY1~97PRlNTEDINJAPAN(IMPRlME
AUJAPON)
3-21
Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (g/12)

-DC controller PC6
Cassette 1 litter motor
M16ON
When 1. Ml6 rotates.
M170N Cassette 2 Utter motor
When I, Ml7 rotates.
C developing motor
J 2223B- 1 -2 -3 J6145Bk- 3 J 22238.4 -5 -6 J 2226A- 6 -7 -6 J 2226A- 9 - 10 -11 J 2223B- 7 -6 -9 J2226A-1 -2 -3 J6157- 3 J 2226A- 12 - 13 - 14
IIBCPLL HBCON ;h 16BkPLL 1 EBkON &
When motor detects error, 1. When I, Ml6C turns ON.
Bk developing motor
When motor detects error, 1. When I. MlBBk turns ON.
n J6145Y-3 Y developing motor
D6YPLL 116YON ;h IBMPLL 16MON & IlSPLL ll9ON ;h 2oPLL 2CrON 87. PlPLL l21ON b
When motor detects error, 1. When 1. Ml6Y turns ON.
M developing motor
When motor detects error, I. When I , Ml BM turns ON.
Duplexing feeding motor
When motor detects error, 1. When I, Ml9 turns ON.
Waste toner feeding motor
When motor detects error, 1. When I. M21 turns ON.
Photosensitive drum motor
When motor detects error , 1 When I, M21 turns ON.
SepaiationIpre-flxlng cleaner motor
wire
J 2220B- 13 - 12
IV J6167 -3 J2224BI
When PW=l, RV-6, deaner moves forward. When MI-6 RV=l, cleaner moves In reverse
3 4,
Duplexing stacking guide motor
1 23-A 23-A 23-S 23-B While M23 Is rotatlng, alternates between I and 0.
-2 -5 -a
-2 -5 .fi,
Figure 3-122
3-22
CANON CM1000 REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU UPON)
J 2229A - 7 ,
Y primary
r-
DC cantroller PCB
M24yw
M24YRV
wire deaner motor
- a
J2229B- 1 M24Mw M primary wire cleaner motor

-'
M24MRV
J - C primary deaner motor
- M24CPW -lo ,M24CRV _ M24Kw

M24KRV
When PW=l , RV=O, deaner moves forward. When PW=o, RV=l, deaner moves in reverse.
J 22298 -11 Bk primary wire deaner motor
- -I2
J6376A1 F J6376B-6 -7 -2 LL J224
Shutter drive motor
- When - 2 When
S-OPND I, shutter spent. S-CLSD 1. shutter doses.
Duplexing reversing motor
while M26 is rotating. alternates between 1 and 0.
Papar Deck motor
When sTMup=o, when
sTMDN=o. liner mcvss 4. STMUp=l, STMDN-1. Qler mews dcwl
Pm-exposure lamp Y
When O, LA1 turns ON
Pm-eqxwre lamp M J662lC-3 -1 -5 -6~ LA30N 24V -7
When o, LA2 hns
ON.
Pm-exposure lamp C
LA3
When 0. LA3 ksns ON.
Pre-exposure lamp Ek
IA4
J662lK-3 -1
- i
LMON
When Y). LA4 turns ON
Transfer blade
[--I J4101
J54-- 29
When l, transfer hlgh voltage of respadwe cdor is ganerated When 14, imamai static ellmlnaknO hrgh voil8ge 1s gWWaled.
Internal stake elimrnatirbg roller 0T 4 1 0 5 1
PC0
I Figure 3-123
COPYRIQHT 0 1997 CANON INC.
3-23
rJ4602L-2
DC controller PCB
, _..
; +
J2215A-7
-----< I+
4605
1 ,d, pCB
i_
_I
A
I I
I
J2217B-7 24V )
When 1. respective high voltage is generated.
Primary charging assembly (Bk) T 4605 T4.606 .-----;r
, Hm;,,,B i_ -,
When l, respective high voltage is generated.
J4606
Developing cylinder (C) J 4703L
J 4702L - 2 -7 6 -6
Developing cylinder (Bk) J 4703L
I-5 -4 -3 -1
-1
_A
1; HVDCEN-K _3 HVDC-K _ 4 HVAC-K _5 HVDCEN-C _6 HVDC-C _ 6 HVAC-C
When 1. respective high voltage Is generated.
zb
HVT34-LPCB
1 24V Developing cylinder (M) J4703R J 4702R - 2 -0 .I J2217A-7
1 4
: : i HVDCEN-M When 1. respectlve h!gh voltage IS generated.
HVTM-R PC0 -_
Figure 3-124
3-24
COPYRlOHT81897CANONINC.
CANONCLClOOOREV.1MAY1997PRlNTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIME
AUJAPON)

-_
DC controller PCB
Stray loner collecting electrode plate Y M C Bk
rj J5002-2
J 2217-l 1 iVACEN iVSRD When 1. stray toner collecting high voltage is generated.
-4
i HVT3B
PCB I_
-1
_I 24V 3
Sepi#at; r assembly J 5,03rn
HVSPAC HVSPDC HVSPEN
When I. separation high voltage is generated.
---
L_-_
Pre-fixing charging assembly
HVT4 PCB _I 24V 1 HVPRF When l, pre-fixing high-voltage 1s generated.
L.
Counter 1 CNT 1 Counter 2 CNT 2
;h HVT5 PCB _ 1 24V J2212B-7 1 8 f CNTl D When l, CNTl turns ON.
-9
CNT2D
When 0. CNT2 turns ON.
Counter 3
CNT 3
t I ,
-10
CNT3D
When 6, CNT3 turns ON.
I
Counter 4 CNT 4
I
t -11 CNT4D When 0. CNT4 turns ON.
4,
Counter 5
CNT 5
-12
CNT5D
When 6, CNTL turns ON.
I
Counter 6
CNT6
I_
-13
CNTGD
When 0, CNT6 turns ON.
Figure 3-l 25
COPYRlGHTQ1997
CANONINC.
CANONCLClOOOREV.lMAY1997
PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
3-25
D. Sequence of Basic Operations

1. Sequence at Power-On
Power switch ON v WMUP 110C v 180C v
I NTR / I I
STSY
<
Transfer belt HP search ICC/ Image correction
Transfer belt motor Transfer charging current
Scanner HP search
Initial potential control
Figure 3-l 26
l
When the fixing temperature reaches 110C after power-on, the photosensitive drum starts to rotate, and initial potential control will start when the potential on the drum has become stable (when the drum has made a l/2 rotation). When the fixing temperature reaches 1 lOC, a transfer belt home position search is executed, at the end of which image position correction will start. The term fixing temperature means the surface temperature of the fixing roller (reading of the thermistor indicated under ANALOG of DISPLAY in service mode).
3-26
COPYRlQHl81997
CANONINC.
CANONCLClOOO
REV.lMAY1997 PRlNTEOINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAU
JApaNI
Period From when the power switch is turned ON until the surface temperature of the upper fixing roller reaches 110C. From when the surface temperature of the upper fixing roller has reached 110C until it reaches 180C. From the end of INTR until the Copy Start key is pressed or the power switch is turned OFF.
Purpose
Remarks
WMUP (warm up)
Waits until the fixing roller warms up.
INTR (initial rotation)
Executes irn,-* corposraon age rection and i nitial potential control.
STBY (standby)
Waits until a control key (e.g., Copy Start key) is pressed.
Table
3-101
COPYRIGHTO
1997CANONINC.
CANONCLClOOO
REV.lMAY1997
PRlNTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
3-27
2. Sequence of Operations
Thick Paper Mode, A4/LTR, 2 Copies, 4Color, Direct, Cassette 1
Copy Star key ON v STSY DSRDY
CNTR
COPY
LSTR
STSY
Figure 3-127
Period From when the Copy Start key is pressed until prescanning ends. From the end of DSRDY until copy paper is drawn for retention. From when copy paper starts to wrap around the transfer belt until all toner has been transferred to the copy paper. Purpose Executes scanning for an original and shading correction. Measures and controls the drum surface potential. Picks up copy paper. Turns ON/OFF the laser according to video signals, and develops and transfers specific colors. Discharges copy paper. LSTR (last rotation) From the end of COPY until the main motor stops. Remarks
DSRDY (scanner ready)
CNTR (control rotation)
COPY (copy)
Stabilizes the photosensitive

drum sensitivity. Removes charges from the transfer belt, and cleans the drum.
Table 3-102
l
The machines scanner becomes ready for operation when the temperature of the fixing roller reaches a specific value so that the image of the original may be read in response to a press on the Copy Start key. Writing of the image on the surface of the photosensitive drum becomes ready when the image signals have been stored in memory. (Image formation starts in relation to a registration slgnal.) Control in relation to signals other than the registration signal is discussed using separate timing charts.
3-28
COPYRIOHT Q 1997 CANON INC.
CANON CLCl 990 REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAWN)
II. ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM

A. Outline
The original exposure system covers functions involved between when originals are exposed and when the reflected light is directed to the CCD. Figure 3-201 shows a cross section of the original exposure system and Figure 3-202 shows its exterior view.
-.-.-. mp.m-.m-.-.
mv.-.-.mw._.
Original exposure system
i._._._._._._._._._._.-.-._._._._. Figure 3-201
Scanner motor (M29)
No. 2 mirror mount
Scanner home position sensor (Ps37)
Figure 3-202
CANON CLClooO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPDN)
3-29
B. Sequence of Basic Operations (original exposure system)

1. Sequence of Operations
l
Without Pre-Scanning (with original detection OFF, ACS OFF, APS OFF)
Copy Staa key ON CNTR I
Scanning lamp
Original scanner motor (M29)

I I I 1
I
Original scanner home position sensor (PS37)
I I
With Pre-Scanning (1 scan over original; standard mode)

Copy Start key ON V CNTR
With Pre-Scanning (2 scans over original; standard mode + marking)

Copy Start key ON V I
CNTR
Kq Reversal (scanner in reverse).
m High-speed rotation.
m Standard CW rotation.
@ @ 0 @
Shading correction. Original position detection, black original detection, AE measurement. Original scanning. Marking area scanning.
Figure 3-203
330
2. Original Scanner Home Position Sensor and Operations

Original scanner motor Operation Forward Original scanner home position sensor (PS37: SCHP) t Reverse
Switches to forward movement.
Moves forward 1 mm, then stops. (The position reached is home position.)
Table 3-201 The original scanner home position sensor turns on: At power-on. At start of copying. At end of original scanning. During CCD adjustment (service mode).
l l l l
PS37 v lmm -iI HP
Original leading edge
8mm !7 A T - Start position Original
I I I @ HP search at power
-on
I I
($I?
I @ Shading correction
@ Original detection
@ Original scan
Figure 3-204
331
C. Scanner Motor
1. Outline
Figure 3-205 shows the circuit used to control the scanner motor, and the circuit has the following functions: 1 Controls the direction of rotation of the scanner motor. 2 Controls the speed of rotation of the scanner motor. The scanner motor changes its direction of rotation between when the scanner moves forward and when it moves in reverse, and its speed of rotation varies according to the selected reproduction ratio. Its speed of rotation when the scanner is moved in reverse is the same regardless of the selected reproduction ratio. It rotates about 10 times as fast as when the scanner is moved forward in Direct.
+24V Q651 +8V
A-E - A-E circuit
Current switching ----L---W Conslant currerll CciWd ClrclN Current detection
Scanner motor (M29)
-.-.-.-.-.~~---.~__-.--.~_.~_,_ Figure 3-205
2. Operation
The microprocessor (Q651) on the scanner motor driver PCB receives mode, distance, and reproduction data from the image processor PCB. Then, in response to the start command, it sends drive pulses to the scanner motor to suit these data units. The scanner motor is a 5phase stepping motor; the direction and the speed of scanning are varied by changing the order of the drive pulses (A through E) and the frequency. To rotate the motor at a high speed when the scanner is moved in reverse, the drive voltage switching circuit switches the power used to drive the motor from 6 V (forward) to 24 V (reverse). The constant current control circuit controls the current flowing to the motor to a constant current to suit the speed of rotation. The circuit cuts the current to the motor by the HOLD-OFF signal while the motor remains at rest during standby to prevent heating of the motor.
3-32
COPYRIDHT Q 1997 CANON INC.
D. Changing the Reproduction Ratio

The reproduction ratio in the main scanning direction (drum axis) is changed by skipping the image signals when writing them to line memory (reduction) or repeating them when reading from line memory (enlargement). The reproduction ratio in the sub scanning direction is changed by moving the mirror mount fast (reduction) or slowly (enlargement).
Scanner motor (M29)
Scanner home position detection signal (SCHP) Scanner home position sensor (PS37)
anner motor driver PCB
Reader controller PCB
Figure 3-206
3-33
E. Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning Lamp

1. Outline
Figure 3-207 shows the circuit used to control the intensity of the scanning lamp, and the circuft has the following functions: 1. Turns ON/OFF the scanning lamp. 2. Checks ON/OFF state of the scanning lamp. 3. Controls the intensity of the scanning lamp. l The circuit controls the scanning lamp so that the intensity is kept to a specific level against fluctuations in voltage.
Lamp regulator J131 -1 RelayFILl Fu Rectifier circuit J135 circuit t t
I
Thermal TP 6 switch (175%
w 0
Lamp regulator --c drive circuit
- Switching
J1305A -7 LAERR
J12 -5
.=
.$
-6 LAON Reader ontroller PC6 -9 LINT

-10
-4
g E .g E d 5
-3 24V -2 t
7
Lamp O N detection circuit z 0, u) s .v f;:
Scanning lamp LA5
-11
Figure 3-207
2. Operations
a. Turning ON/OFF the Scanning Lamp
The lamp regulator drive circuit turns OFF when LAON=O, causing the intensity control circuit and then the scanning lamp (LA5) to turn OFF. When LAON=l, the lamp regulator drive circuit turns ON to activate the intensity control circuit, thereby turning ON the scanning lamp (LA5).
3-34
CANON CLCIOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
b. Checking ON/OFF of the Scanning Lamp When the scanning lamp (LA5) is ON, the lamp ON detection circuit remains ON at all times sending the ON detection signal to the timer circuit. If the scanning lamp remains ON for about 50 set or more because of an error, the timer circuit activates the relay drive circuit to turn on the relay (RLl). This condition cuts the AC input and turns OFF the scanning lamp; at the same time, the lamp error signal (LAERR) is sent to the reader controller PCB, indicating E220 on the control panel. When the relay has activated, remove the cause and turn OFF/ON the power switch to reset. The CLCl 000 is equipped with the following two types of protection functions to prevent malfunction of the scanning lamp: l If the temperature inside the thermal switch exceeds 175%, the thermal switch turns OFF to cut the power to the scanning lamp. l If an overcurrent flows because of a short-circuit around the scanning lamp, the fuse turns OFF, thereby cutting off the power to the lamp regulator. caution; .+l*,r /* X^ I,,X-,II*Pr,,^:X ^I ,; ~~><,, _, ,; _^ , & ,
I, i, ,
The thermal switch (TPS) is used on a DC line, and its contact is subjectto damage upon activation. Do not re-use it once it became activated; otherwise, its operation will be unpredictable.
_, ,~II *,, ,,PI,,
c. Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning Lamp The intensity of the scanning lamp is determined by the level of the intensity adjustment signal (LINT) from the image processor PCB. The intensity control circuit inside the lamp regulator sends pulse signals (PWM) suited to the LINT signal to the switching circuit, which keeps turning ON and OFF at very short intervals. The current to the scanning lamp is controlled by varying the ON/OFF intervals, ultimately controlling the lamp intensity. The level of the LINT signal is determined when AUTO-ADJ under CCD of FUNC in service mode is executed; thereafter, it remains the same at all times. Be sure to execute AUTO-ADJ under CCD of FUNC in service mode whenever you have replaced the scanning lamp or the image processor PCB.
3-35
III.
IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM
.
, .
A. Outline
The image processing system consists of the following: 1. CCD line sensor used to convert the reflected light from originals into analog video signals. 2. Analog processor PCB used to generate digital video signals from analog video signals. 3. Group of PCBs used to process digital video signals (image processor PCB, memory PCB, Preview Monitor Board).
r
b
Original exposure system c--------_-------
,__~-~--_---~_~~_-~_~__-~~~~~~ I I
Image processing system
I
Digital video signal
CCD line sensor
I I
R,G,B c
I I I I
Laser exposure system r------- I I
Preview Monitor Board
IP memory PCB
I
I I Image processor PCB
ED board Al
1 F/k; s,gna, I I I I I i I I
J
i--_-----------_--- j
I_____-_______-__-__-~--~-~--~~-~~~~~~~
Figure 3-301
3-36
B. CCD/CCD Driver
1. CCD
The CLClOOOs image input block is a 34ine CCD line sensor, each line consisting of 5000 photocells (Figure 3-302). Each line is covered with a red, green, or blue color filter. The light reflected by an original is projected to the CCD line sensor in reduced form, and the light colorseparated by the R, G, and B color filters is photo-converted. The signal charges occurring after conversion are synchronized with the shift pulses generated by the analog processor PCB and stored temporarily in the transfer block (single line); then, they are synchronized with the clock pulses generated by the analog processor PCB and sent to the CCD in sequence.
Front
Rear
Filter Light-receiving block { Transfer block 6 5 4 3 2 1
Figure 3-302
The transfer block and the output block of each line sensor consist of an odd channel and an even channel.
Clock pulses (odd) Transfer block (odd) Output block (odd)
Light-receiving block
CCD shift pulses
Transfer block (even) Clock pulses (even)
Output block (even)
Figure 3-303
347
C. Analog Image Processing

The analog video signals from the CCD driver is processed on the analog processor PCB (gain adjustment) and converted into digital video signals. The analog processor PCB has the following functions: Corrects the gain of R, G, and B analog video signals. Corrects the offset in the CCD output. Executes A/D conversion. Supplies power to the CCD driver. Generates clock signals for CCD driver and main scanning direction sync signals.
Analog processor PCB
I
ODD,EVEN R analog video signal , ODD,EVEN I , G analog video signal ODD,EVEN Gain correction Offset correction 7 . w S .$!.? R digital video signal / 8
c-
z 3
G digital video signal I 8 c
I , B analog video signal

ODDEVEN
c-
CLWSP ~~~~~
Figure 3-304 The analog video signals from the CCD driver are subjected to gain correction and offset correction: specifically, the output voltages in the absence of light are made even (offset correction) and the ratio of amplification is made constant to even out the photo-conversion efficiencies of CCD pixels (gain adjustment) The RGB video signals of the odd and even channels are integrated into a single channel in the offset correction block and are converted into 8-bit digital signals (ND conversion) according to the voltage level and sent to the image processor PCB.
3-38
CANON CLClOOO RN.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
D. Digital Image Processing

1. Outline
The digital video signals from the analog processor PCB are processed by a group of PCBs and sent to the video controller and other external devices. Each PCB has the following functions: a. Image Processor Motherboard (provided as standard) Relays video signals. b. Image Processor PCB (provided as standard) Processes video signals (basic processing; excluding area processing and color editing). C. EC0 PCB (provided as standard) Supports the image processor PCB for image processing. d. IP Memory PCB (provided as standard) Compresses and stores images (single A3 page max.). e. ED Board Al (option) The installation of this PCB enables the following image processing: 9 Framing l Blanking l Original type selection l Gradation l Color filter l Base color l Color conversion l Coloring l Text processing l Texture l Special effects l Area processing l Freehand l Text composition f. Interface Motherboard (provided as standard) Relays video signals. Interface Board Bl/B2 (option) Corrects differences in color space between CLClOOO and IPU or other external device. h. Preview Monitor Board (option) Converts video signals (YMCBk) after image processing into RGB signals for display on a CRT.
349
The above PCBs are organized as shown in Figure 3-305. The RGB signals (simultaneously coming as a result of a single scan) from the analog processor PCB are converted into YMC and text signals on the image processor PCB and compressed and temporarily stored on the memory PCB. The memory PCB generates Bk signals based on these YMC and text signals. The YMCBk signals read from the IP memory PCB are sent to the video controller PCB by way of the image processor PCB. The ED board Al processes the image signals from the image processor PCB (area processing, text composition). The communication with an external device (e.g., IPU, IPU-II) is by way of the interface Board Bl/B2 (which also corrects color space). The Preview Monitor Board converts the YMCBk signals to which all image processing has been made into RGB signals for transmission to the CRT.
Diaital imaae _ orocessina . e
,---__-_--_---_~_-__--~-__--_______---_-__-__----_~
I
I I I
R.G,B +--_? i
1
I I I I
Image processor motherboard Y,M,C,Bk
f RW
Y.M.C,Bk Y,M.C.Bk R,G,B
i
I
I 1
I I I
I I
R,G,B
,/
II I
I
I I
I
Image processor PC6
I*
7;
Interface motherboard
A
,
Y,M,C,Bk
Y.M.C.Bk Interface Board Bi/B2
I I
A i
I I
Y,M,Ctext
I 1
i Figure 3-305
3-40
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAMIN)
2. Functional Blocks
Figure 3-306 shows the organization of
ipletion of all image processing, the image .e converted to RGB signals. Preview Monitor Board
The image signals from external _~ devices are stored in memory without compression.
i I i
If text synthesii, text data read from the original.
i
I I I I I I
I
Y,M,C,Bk __-_----_-- i
\
w
- - - - -,revent confusion;
CANON CLCl OOr
341
a. Shading Correction The output of the CCD is not always the same for the following reasons; this is true even if the original has a uniform density: l The sensitivities of the pixels of the CCD are not the same. l The degree of transmission of the lens differs between the center and the periphery. l The intensity of the scanning lamp differs between the middle and the edges. l The scanning lamp deteriorates. To compensate for the above discrepancies, the CLClOOO executes shading correction: a) The CCD reads the bar code under the standard white plate and determines the correction target value. (See Reference 1.)
Standard white plate
Bar code
Scanning lamp CCD
Figure 3-307 b) The CCD measures the light reflected by the standard white plate and generates data representing the measurement.
Standard white plate Bar code Copyboard glass // // Scanning lamp CCD
Figure 3-308 c) The shading correction circuit compares the measurement data (step b) against the target value (step a) and stores the difference in memory as the shading correction value. The shading correction value is used to obtain uniform data values when scanning originals. Measurements are taken each time the Copy Start key is pressed.
Figure 3-309
343
b. 3-Line CCD Position Matching

The machines CCD consists of three independent CCDs covered with either a R, G, or 6 filter. For this reason, the line image generated by each CCD at a given point in time has a discrepancy of about 0.5 mm (8 lines) in sub scanning direction in relation to the copyboard glass. To correct such discrepancies, the f3 and G image signals are temporarily stored in line memory first and transmitted after they are synchronized with the B image signals.
0.5 mm (8 lines)
,-__-__--_-__-_------, II I R!Line memory I

I I I I I I I
I, I I
I I 1 I I I ,
G Scanning direction B
I II II I
Line memory
I II II II
I _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _________:
control circuil CCD Ekl
Figure 3-310
_4V j : ( *_ ,
.
Figure 3-311
.
The delay iir 8 image signals Is maximum at 400% enlargement; in other word;, the d image sl~nala are delayed for 64 lines, and the G image signals are delayed for 32 lines. For Instance, at 320% enlargement, the R image signals must be delayed by 51.2 lines; In sum a case, the following oorreotlon is made using data representing adjaoent pixels: ;~~~ ,._ ,, 51.2nd line pixel data = 0.8 x (Slst line image data) + 0.2 x (62nd line pi:$ data)
; _,~. I./ ; ;; j, 1 /.,.
COPYAIDHT 0 1997 CANON INC.
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTEO IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPONI
c. Original Position Identification

The size of an original and its position on the copyboard are identified.
X axis (sub scanning direction) Kw) 4 x, x2
Copyboard
Figure 3-312
Figure 3-313
Figure 3-312 shows when a rectangular original is placed along the X axis (sub scanning direction) and along the Y-axis (main scanning direction) on the copyboard. Figure 3-313 shows an original placed askew. The underside of the copyboard (cover is mirror-finished (preventing refraction of light) instead of coated white as in the case of conventional copiers so that only the area where there is an original reflects the light of the scanning lamp to the CCD.
Area with an
original Copybard cow,r
* Area without an original
17
1
\COPyboed Ql=
Original
Figure 3-314
Figure 3-315
In general, most originals are white paper so that the area identified as being white during scanning can be assumed to represent an original. In other words, a rectangle (or square) whose diagonal line runs between coordinates XminNmin and Xmax/Ymax is identified as an original. If an original is placed at an angle as in the case of Figure 3-313, the rectangle whose diagonal line runs between PI and P2 will be identified as an original.
3-45
The position and the size of an original are automatically identified to enable automatic ratio selection, automatic paper selection, and image shifts.
d. Mirror Image Processing c Original 2. h4aii scanning direction
Principle When reading data from the RAM for a single scan, reading is executed in reverse to create a mirror image in relation to the main scanning direction.
Address 12345676.. P 9 In zk 3 1 pixel (1 byte) . ..nnn -2-l
).
Writing
)Reading
Figure 3-316 e. Input Masking When light reflected by an original is separated into three colors by color separation filters (RGB), it would be ideal if each filter let through light of a specific range of wavelengths and blocked out light of other wavelengths.
Figure 3-317
500
600
Wavelength (nm)
Figure 3-318
3-46
COPYRIQHT @ 1997 CANON INC.
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1897 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAWN)
In reality, however, filters tend to pass light of various wavelengths. In the case of the G filter, excess B and R components are present while the G component is not always adequate. In this block, excess image components are removed from the RGB image signals and the shortage is compensated for so as to bring the characteristics closer to the ideal characteristics.
G component (shortage) 100% kl s
. E
400 /
2 /
500
600 \
\
700
Excess B component
Excess R component
Figure 3-319 f. image Composition In this block, two units of image data (RGB signals) read by the scanner are integrated. Such integration may be any of the following; for details, see the Users Manual: l Patch integration l Full integration l Area integration
(Imya from
Image B
scanner ,
1
A IP memory PCB
image
R.G.B I
r-~~---~-~~~--~--
I R.G.B
____
I---------------,
1
t
I II
I
t
Image lntagratim
I
I <
I I
lmaga
R.G.B I
lmagas A + B I ir__,__-_____----____J
procaasoor PCB
I i Image memory I I I-_____________
I I II
_I
Figure 3-320 In the case of full integration, image A, which has been read by the scanner first, is stored in the image memory first and integrated with image B, which has been read next. If image A is used as the background and image A is specified as the area, image A, which has been read first, is stored in the image memory on the IP memory PCB and processed on the ED board by the area data from the control panel/editor and then integrated with image B.
I
Image B If
I
OA
R.G.B
_-.
i
,
I
t
,
I____-_
Imwmmov j
I
I
_____---I
IPmalnolvPcB
Figure 3-321
COPYRIOHT 8 1997 CANON INC. CANON ClClOOO REV.1 MAY 1897 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRJME AU JAPON) 3-47
g. Text Extraction
In this block, text is extracted from an image to generate text signals (representing thickness of lines and hue data). Executing UCR processing based on such text signals enables reproduction of naturally emphasized edges and fine, black lines.
--_-_----_
I I I I
I R,GB
Text extraction _____-_--_~--------~-~_-_-~-~~~~~-~-__
-------___ T Text signal
I
Text signal generation
I II
Identification signal
Identification signal Image area separation

1
Line width identification -I
_________-__-_-_-__-_I__________________--~-~-~-~~~~~~-~----Figure 3-322
Text signals consist of the following elements: 1. Image Area Separation In this block, shaded areas and continuous density areas of an image are distinguished, enabling reproduction of naturally emphasized edges in dotted areas. 2. Line Width Identification In this block, the width of the area (text) to which a specific pixel belongs is identified, thereby enabling reproduction of naturally emphasized edges suited to the thickness of characters. 3. Edge Detection In this block, the position of a specific pixel is identified as being or not being along the edge of a character through comparison against adjacent pixels. 4. Color Identification In this block, the hue of a specific pixel is identified. The result of identification may be black, or other color. The Bk signal (explained later) is generated based on the above characteristics.
3-48
COPYRlOHTQ1997CANONINC.
CANONCLClMtOREV.lMAY1997
PRlNTEOINJAPAN(IMPAlME
AUJWNI
Removing the Background (adjusting the background level) When the CCD reads the light reflected by an original, it also reads the color data of the surface of the paper (background). In this block, the surface of paper (background) is identified for correction of image signals, thereby preventing fogging of white backgrounds and improving reproduction quality. Pixels are identified as representing the background of an original if they tend to appear most frequently in the sample image data collected during pre-scanning and, in addition, if the level of the R, G, and 6 signals is 200 or more (Figure 3-324).
I
i.
aI
- 255 - 200 -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- 255 - . - 200 - .-_
--
Background pixel
--0-o_a------_---.--__
--
Figure 3-324 Background level adjustment in user mode has two sub modes: mode A and mode B, each using a different method of correction. In mode A, only background pixels are processed; the color of the background is removed by correcting the level of the RGB signal of the pixels to 255. In mode B, the RGB signals of the background pixels are removed from the image data for the entire image area. This way, the image on the back of the copy is removed if the copy is transparent enough to let the back image show through.
3-50
COPYAIOHT 8 1997 CANON INC.
CANON CLC1900 REV.1 MAY 1997 PAINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPoN)
i.
Logarithmic Correction and BGR + YMC Conversion
a) Logarithmic Conversion The CCD output has a linear characteristic in relation to the light reflected by an original. However, the density as perceived by the eye is not linear in relation to the reflected light. Figure 3-325 shows the relationship between the density of an original and the output of the CCD as perceived by the eye. To compensate for the discrepancy, level conversion is executed as shown in Figure 3-326.
CCD output 225-Output level
A
255--
Black Original density
VIhite Input level
265
Figure 3-325 b) BGR + YMC Conversion The circuit generates Y, M, and C signals taking advantage of the fact that B, G, and R (light) are complementary to Y, M, and C (toner).
Figure 3-326
Y B G R Absorbed Reflected Reflected M Reflected Absorbed Reflected C Reflected Reflected Absorbed
Table 3-301
Transmission through filter
Reflaotlon by toner
7r
I
Y
500 600 400 5oc M 600 C
I,
700
Wavelength (nm)
Wavelength (nm)
Figure 3-327
Figure 3-326
COPYRIGHTQ
1997 CANONINC.
CANON CLClOOO
REV.1 MAY1997 PRlNTEOINJAPAN(lMPRIMEAUJAPON)
3-51
The degree of light transmitted by each of the filters of the CCD (B, G, R) and the density (Y, M, C) of an original are in a complementary relationship; level conversion is executed as in Figure 3329 to generate Y, M, and C signals.
BGR YMC (Y, M C) A 255 -
k. Removing Moire When originals consisting of dots (printed material, for example) are read, moire can occur in the output. This block removes moire from image inputs. Images consist of patterns of various densities. Areas where dark and light patterns Irepeat in high density are called high frequency components; on the other hand, areas where dark and
0 0 255
0% 3, R)
Figure 3-329
called low frequency components. Within image data, the frequency components of dotted areas fall between 5.0 and 7.0 lines/mm; the output gain is lowered for such components, thereby evening out the dotted components and preventing moire (Figure 3-330). This processing is executed for the dotted areas extracted by the previously discussed text extraction block if the original type is set as text/printed photo or printed photo. Note that the sight characteristics of human beings are low in this range.
l
light patterns repeat in low density are
1-
1.0
I 2.0
3.0
I 4.0
5.0
1 6.0
c
7.0
(line/mm)
Figure 3-330
3-52
COPYRIGHT Q lQ97 CANON INC.
CANON CLMOOO ROl.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPAIME AU JAPON)
I. Reproduction Ratio Processing a) Reproduction Ratio Processing 1 Horizontal Reproduction Ratio (main scanning direction) When writing image data into memory or reading image data from memory, data units are skipped when writing (reduction) or are read a number of times when reading (enlargement). 2 Vertical Reproduction Ratio (sub scanning direction) The scanner is moved at different speeds to change the width of the line, scanning each pixel on the original. See Table 3-302 for how the ratios are varied.
as it is and read as it is.
Table 3-302 b) Enlargement Correction Processing The image data is corrected so that the difference in density between pixels will not vary excessively when producing enlarged copies. Figure 3-331 shows image data of an original, image data at time of enlargement, and image data after enlargement correction.
image density Image density Image density
-li 1 pixel
!~ 1 pixel
1 1 pixel
Figure 3-331
3-53
m. IP Memory PCB Since the CLClOOO uses four photosensitive drums, it temporarily stores image signals in image memoryThe image signals (Y, M, C and text signals) from the scanner are sent to the IP memory PC6 and compressed to l/6 the original size and stored in the image memory. The data is read according to the read signal generated in relation to the ITOP signal and sent to the image processor after the UCR processing block has generated the Bk signal. The image signals from an external device are subjected to UCR processing without compression and sent to the image processor PCS (For this, the DRAM memory kit must be installed.)
Image from
external device
IP memory PCB
1I
compyion
Text signal ;u
r-+
3-54
Image processor PCB
Figure 3-332
CANON CLC1999 REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
n. UCR (under color removal) Processing Theoretically, mixing Y, M,and C toners in equal parts should produce black. However, since neither one of the toners has pure color absorption characteristics*, mixing the three toners representing three colors will not produce pure black. In this block, the Bk signal is generated based on the Y, M, and C signals so that the reproduction of black can be improved by the addition of the Bk signal to the Y, M, and C signals. See discussions on YMC conversion.
l
- 255 -
-------_____
--- --___
Gray component
Y
I-
Figure 3-333 The Bk signal is generated as follows: The gray components of the YMC signals are as indicated in Figure 3-333. These gray components are removed and replaced with the Bk signal. The replacing component used here is called an UCR amount, and in the case of Figure 3-334, the UCR amount is 100%. In such a case, Bk toner will be added to all density areas, possibly causing fogging in light areas. Figure 3-334 As a remedy, the UCR amount is increased or decreased with reference to the text signal, thereby limiting the UCR amount to less than 100%. This processing is executed for each pixel.
255 _ _ _--------- -t l I -
255 ---__-__-------
--
UCR
Figure 3-335
3-55
o. Output masking A color image is reproduced by color toners with Y toner absorbing the B component, with M toner absorbing the G component, and with C toner absorbing the R component. However, in practice, the toners do not have pure color absorption characteristics as shown in Figure 3-336. In general, Y toner tends to have good absorption characteristics, but M toner tends to have undesirable absorption characteristics for the B component; and C toner likewise tends to have undesirable absorption characteristics for the G and the B components (segments enclosed in Figure 3-336). In other words, M toner if left as it is would tend ,to have color reproduction characteristics that include the Y component, and C toner would have color reproduction characteristics that include the M and the Y compo, nents.
c Y
A lGQ%
400
500 +----t B G
600 R
700 -
Figure 3-336 For this reason, reproduction of red by mixing Y toner and M toner would produce a yellowish red because of the Y component of M toner. Real red could be reproduced by removing the Y component from Y toner (masking) in advance. This block makes such correction by masking the excess component in each toner.
356
COPYRlQHTO1997CANONINC.
CANONCLClOOOAEV.1MAYl997 PRlNTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJ~N)
p. Filter Processing
In this block, computations are made so that a crisp or soft image may be obtained to suit the settings of copying mode or sharpness mode selected on the control panel. If image data shown in Figure 3-337 is input, the output level will be as shown in Figure 3-338 with sharpness set to weak. Setting sharpness to strong will emphasize changes in the density of images, making the copy images crisp.
Black 255
1
1 pixel
2 0 0 -I
.
White 0
Main scanning direction .
Figure 3-337 Input Level
Black 255
Black 255 200
100
100
White 0
Main scanning direction 0 After output
White 0
Main scanning direction . ... . .
Figure 3-338 Sharpness Mode Set to Weak
Figure 3-339 Sharpness Mode Set to Strong
3-67
q. Color Conversion In this block, a specific color of an original is converted into a different color. (For details, see the Users Manual.) When an area is selected on the editor, bit map data will be generated based on area data to determine which pixels of the image should be corrected. In addition, if a registered color has been selected by a color palette, color data will be read from the bit map memory to represent the selected pixels on the image.
The area data represents areas on the original to be edited and c o l o r . , ,
--1
,;selected
Image A Area data
I ED Board Al
i I
Bit map d,lta generation71
Smoothing
\
1
it
I
Color conversion V To image processor PCB
Bit map memory
Color data (registered color, selected from the color palette) In the bit map memory Is sent.
Figure 3-340
3-58
COPYfWHT Q 1997 CANON INC.
CANON CCC1000 REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTEO IN JAPAN (IMPAIME
AU JAPON)
r. Color Editing This block executes the following color editing: l Gradation l Color filter l Base color l Coloring l Special effect . Text composition Except in text composition: bit map data is generated based on the mode data (pattern and color of gradation or area) selected on the control panel and integrated with image A, which has been read by the scanner.
ED Board Al
Figure 3-341 In the case of text composition, image A, which has been read by the scanner, is converted into binary data by the ED Board Al; then, bit map data is generated based on the area data. The bit map data is temporarily stored in the bit map memory and integrated with image 9, which has been read next.
,
I
Ifnags A Image B
;____-_rjr__-___:!--J__________
Ted dmla
j-_-c___.
(0
tI
8I8 1 c Bll map mmoty 1 801 \ II 1I v 010_____________________-_____________ wm

Figure 3-342
cQnvwbd Ihb blIllry data gmerm hti d&a
3-59
s. Density Processing The correction curve for density processing varies depending on the following: Density key (control panel) :: Color balance (control panel) C. Color balance (service mode; COL-ADJ) d. Light area offset adjustment (service mode; OFST under COL-ADJ) e. Text/photo mode As indicated in Figure 3-343, either a dark or light curve will be selected to suit the settings of items from a. through d. If text mode is selected for item e., a curve that enables reproduction of dark text without risking fogging will be seiected (Figure 3-344).
Copy density Copy density
Original density
Original density
Figure 3-343
Figure 3-344
3-60
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PAINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME
AU JAPON)
t. Monitor Controller PCB In this block, the final image data (YMCBk) is converted into RGB data for display on the CRT.
Image from scanner
Control panehditor Area data Calibration data
Image processor PCB
Monitor controller PCB --_-_----_------_--------------- _
4 RG,B II4
I
i
Image editing
.
Calibration data
Area data
RGB
Area image generation
Area data
W.3 I
I I I
Figure 3-345 The CRT output correction block corrects image data using the calibration data entered from the control panel. The calibration serves to bring the printing output and the display image (on the CRT) closer to each other by varying the image density signals. In the image editing block, the image (data) is rotated, shifted, or enlarged as specified on the control panel. The area image generation block generates image data for such items as an area frame to be displayed on the CRT; the initial data and the post-edit data are integrated and displayed on the CRT. Stores the coordinates nearest the start of the main scanning line where black changes to white.
3-61
IV. LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM

A. Outline
The laser exposure system consists of a laser unit, which is the source of laser beams, a laser scanning unit, which performs laser scanning (main scanning direction) using a polygon (&facet) mirror, and a BD detection PCB, which generates sync signals for scanning direction.
DC controller PCB
Polygon mirror
Laser unit for M
Laser driver PCB Motor driver PCB
Video controller PCB
BD signal
Figure 3-401 The video signals (for M in Figure 3-401), which Is synchronized for main and sub scanning directions by the video controller, are converted by the laser driver into laser drive signals that represent the level of the signals. The laser beam is generated by the laser unit using this laser drive signal. The laser beam comes to have scanning characteristics in a specific direction because of the polygon mirror, which rotates at a high speed. The laser beam hits and scans the negatively charged photosensitive drum (Figure 3401) to form a static latent image on the photosensitive drum.
3-62
CANON CLCl990 REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JWON)
The CLCl 000 is equipped with a laser unit for each color (Y, M, C, Bk), each unit directing a laser beam against its corresponding photosensitive drum. The polygon mirror consists of top and bottom blocks, generating four channels of laser beams as shown in Figure 3-402.
Laser unit for C
Laser unit for M
F \ \
1
0 / Laser unit for Y
Reflecting mirror for Y
Laser unit for Bk
Figure 3-402 Since the positions of the laser units and the direction of rotation of the polygon mirror differ for MN and C/Bk, the laser beam scans the photosensitive drums in the opposite directions as shown in Figure 3403.
Front
Figure 3-403
343
B. Sequence of Operations (laser exposure system)

Figure 3-404 shows the sequence of operations for the laser exposure system. The laser scanner motor starts to rotate as soon as the power switch is turned on and continues to rotate at a specific speed until the power switch is turned off. Each semiconductor laser is 00-activated as soon as the Copy Start key is pressed and is PWM-activated in relation to the image leading edge signal to form a latent image on the drum. The PWM activation period is given a delay for each color to make up for the distance between drums. When the PWM activation for a single scan ends, the laser turns fully for BD signal detection; the next scanning operation starts when the BD signal is generated.
Power switch ON v
Copy Start key ON v
Figure 3-404
3-64
COPYRIDHT 0 l!l97 CANON INC.
CANON CLCl 10 REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
C. Laser Scanner Motor

The laser scanner motor (M4) is a DC motor, and the motor starts to rotate at a specific speed when the laser scanner motor drive signal (SMON*) goes 0. If the rotation speed of the motor is at a specific value, the laser scanner motor ready signal (SMRDY) goes O, indicating to the DC controller that the condition is normal; if the rotation speed of the motor deviates because of an error, SMRDY goes I, displaying error code El 10 on the control panel.
Laser scanner motor driver
SMRDY Speed control circuit SMON
1,
Laser scanner motor
DC power supply PCB
Figure 3-405
3-55
D. Generating the BD Signal

The BD signal is used to synchronize video signals (for the main scanning direction of the laser beam). The laser beam reflected by the BD mirror located in the optical path of the beam is detected by the BD detection PCB, and the detection signal is used to generate the BD signal. As can be learned from Figure 3-406, as many as four BD detection PCBs are used to deal with the four colors and the BD signal is generated for each channel. BkBD-PCEl
Figure 3-406
In reference to the BD signal for each color, the video signal is synchronized for the main scanning direction on the video controller PCB (details follow) and sent-to the laser driver PCB.
Y,M.C,Bk
Figure 3-407
3-66
COPYRIDHT 0 1997 CANON INC.
CANON CLCIOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAfW
E. Video Controller
1. Outline
Figure 3-408 shows the video controller PCB, which controls the synchronization of video signals from the image processor PCB and sends the video signals to the laser driver; the main functions of the circuits are as follows: Generates clock signals for synchronization control. Controls synchronization in main/sub scanning direction. Corrects density. Counts video data units. Generates image patterns. Each of the Y, M, C, and Bk video signals compressed and stored on the IP memory PCB is read in sync with the ITOP signal (image leading edge signal) and sent to the video controller PCB through the image processor PCB. (See Synchronization Control in Main/Sub Scanning Direction.) The video signals are then synchronized for the sub scanning direction based on the ITOP signal and are subjected to gamma correction based on the conversion table in the density correction RAM. (See Density Correction.) Of the video signals after density correction, the Y and the M signals are sent to a special memory for synchronization in the main scanning direction. Since the main scanning direction for the C and the Bk video signals are opposite that of the Y and the M video signals, the writing direction is reversed before transmission to the memory for synchronization in the main scanning direction. The synchronization for the main scanning direction is by clock signals generated based on the BD signals. (See Synchronization Control for Main/Sub Scanning Direction.)
C.Bk Main scanning rynchronlzalkm Video sl@~al C,Bk c
B !I
Figure 3-408
COPYRlGHTQ1997
CANONINC.
PRlNTEOINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAU
JAPON)
3-67
2. Synchronization Control for the Main/Sub Scanning Direction

The video signals are synchronized for the main scanning direction based on the BD signal by the video controller. The video signal after gamma correction is written to the memory for main scanning direction synchronization in response to the main scanning sync signal (HSYNC) based on the write BD signal (WBD). At this time, writing is enabled by the write enable signal (WE*), and the same timing is used for Y, M, C, and Bk. Reading from the memory for the main scanning direction is executed based on the BD signal for Y, M, C, and Bk. In the sample shown in Figure 3-410, the Y main scanning sync signal (YSYNC) is generated in sync with the Y BD signal (YBD); the read enable signal (YRE) is generated after a specific period of time* following the generation of YSYNC; and the Y video signals are read from the memory for the main scanning direction. *May be changed; used for image position correction explained later.
I
Video control PC6
I
Video signal /1 WE jirectionsyncz-, j d,Bk c
BD detection PCB
Clock generation for /
CRE, BkRE
Figure3-409
Write BD signal (WBD)
Y BD signal (YBD) Y main scanning sync signal (YSYNC) Y read enable signal (YRE) 7 I I Y video slgnal (YVD)
Figure 3-410
3-68
COPYRlQHTO1997
CANONINC.
CANONCLClO99REV.lMAY1997
PRINTED IN JAPAN(lMPRIMEAUJmN)
The video signals are synchronized for the sub scanning direction by the video controller based on the image leading edge signal (ITOP). The ITOP signal is triggered by the output of the transfer belt home position sensor, and the timing of output varies according to paper size. When the ITOP signal is generated, the read enable signal for each color (YMRE in the case of Figure 3-411) causes the video signals (YMCBk) to be read from the page memory area for transmission to the video controller. (As can be learned from the timing chart, the read enable signal for each color is given a delay for the distance between drums.) The video signal is forced to remain 0 until the print area signal (YFRM in Figure 3-411) is generated, thereby creating a leading edge margin.
t
Sub scanning sync CQntrol
Print area signal \
Figure 3-411
Image leading edge slgnal
Figure 3-412
3-69
3. OPERATIONS AND TIMING
3. Density Correction
The relationship between video signals and image densities is as shown in Figure 3-413. As can be learned, using the video signals as they are for laser exposure will not result in the faithful reproduction of image densities.
Image density
I
Output image darker
Output image lighter than original 0 Video signal 255
Figure 3-413 To ensure that the image density will be reproduced throughout the entire range of the video signals, the video signals are converted along the correction curve (Figure 3-414), thereby bringing the output characteristics closer to the ideal characteristics.
Image density 255 ideal characteristics
/ \ \
Correction curve
/
Video signal input 255 u Video slgnal 255
Figure 3-414 The correction curve for conversion is stored in the density correction RAM on the video controller in relation to the data for SALT and PASCAL. *See discussionson the image formation system and the image control. vl6WWntmI.rPea r DC contrdirt PCB
sALTlPAscM data
Flgure 3-415 The video data (YMCBk) is corrected against the correction curve for correction and sent to the laser driver.
3-70
CANON CLCi990 REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTEO IN JAPAN (IMPRIME
AU JAPW
4. Generating Test Patterns

The video controller has a RAM area for generating test patterns; using a channel independent from that of the video signals from the image processor PCB, the signals are synchronized for the sub scanning direction to generate video signals.
vldea contmller PCB
Figure 3-416
Address data for test patterns is generated in response to the ITOP signal, and addresses are assigned in the RAM for gamma correction. The selected video data is read from the RAM and sent to the laser driver. For how to generate the test patterns and sample images, see the Service Handbook.
COPYRlQHTQ1897CANONINC.
CANONCLClOOO
REV.1 MAY1997 PRlNTEDINJAPAN(IMPAIME AUJAPON)
3-71
F. Laser Driver
Figure 3-417 shows the laser driver PCB used to generate the laser drive signal from video signals. The circuit drives the semiconductor laser units, and the laser power adjustment PCB monitors and controls the intensity of the laser beam. Each of these PCBs has the following functions: Laser Driver PCB 1 Generates the laser drive signals for 400 lines/200 lines/266 lines, 2 Turns ON/OFF the laser. 3 Selects activation mode. Laser Power Adjustment PCB 1 Monitors laser intensity. 2 Generates activation current. 3 Detects errors in activation current.
Laser driver PCB
i
8 1 Signal generation for 200 lines/ 266lines I-L -1 f
Laser beam
I
1 L,
Modesignal
Laser power adjustment PCEJ

I
I
I I
E r r o r
slgnal
I ~2~~~&~
Activation current generation
Laser power setting
Figure 3-417
3-72
CANON CLCIWO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
The video signals from the video controller PCB are 8-bit signals and assume a value between 0 (OOH) through 255 (FFH). Pulse signals that suit the signals are generated in the 400-/200-/ 266-line laser drive signal generation block. (Figure 3-418) The selector switches between 400 lines and 200 lines and turns off or on the laser in response to the mode signal. The laser drive signals generated in this way are applied to the semiconductor laser to turn on the laser beam. The laser beam has characteristics which cause its intensity to increase rapidly when the applied current exceeds the activation current. Since the activation current (I) varies according to the ambient temperature, the intensity at the point of activation is monitored at all times and the activation current is controlled so as to maintain a specific intensity. The laser power adjustment mechanism used when servicing the CLClOOO varies the activation current (by volumes VRl and VR2 on the laser power adjustment PCB), thereby properly setting the upper and the lower limits of the intensity. If a correct intensity cannot be obtained because of an error in the semiconductor laser, the activation current will abnormally increase; such a condition is detected by the activation current error signal (ElOO-xx02).
Figure 3-418
Point of activation
Current
Intensity Upper limit
------A
: Point of acttvation /I
-_c/b Current - ON current Actlvatbn current
Activation current
*
ON currenl
Figure 3-419
COPYRlGHTQ1997
CANONINC.
PRINTEOINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
3-73
G. Image Position Correction

1. Outline
A color image is formed on copy paper by laying images of four different colors in the order of Y, M, C, and then Bk. Displacement of images can occur because of the following factors: Displacem&t in main scanning direction Displacement in sub scanning direction Discrepancy in reproduction ratio Slant
Feeding direction
Yl
(
Feeding direction 4
Discrepancy in main scanning direction
Discrepancy in sub scanning direction
Feeding direction Feeding direction
Discrepancy in reproduction ratio
Angle
Figure 3420
3-74
COPYRIGHT 0 lg97 CANON INC.
CANON CLCltttM REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME
AU JAPON)
To prevent such displacement, the CLClOOO corrects image positions in relation to the above factors: 1 Transfers the image position correction pattern (output from the RAM area of the video controller) directly to the transfer belt (for Y, M, C, and Bk). Reads the pattern of each color by the CCD for reading patterns. Using the M pattern for reference, analyzes each pattern to determine the degree of discrepancy using the CPU on the DC controller. Prepares correction data based on the results of analysis, and imposes feedback on each factor.
CCD control PCB for
correction
1 LEDON
DC controller PCB
I I
LED control
Video controller
Figuru 3-421
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPONI
346
2. Forming and Reading Correction Patterns

As the first step in correcting image position, a pattern is formed. The image data for such patterns is from the pattern generation RAM in the video controller, and patterns are formed on the transfer belt using the data as when creating regular images for copies. As shown in Figure 3-422, patterns are formed along the front and the rear ends in the order of Y, C, M, and Bk and forwarded to the CCD for pattern reading..
Rear C drum M drum Ydrum
Image poslion correction pattern
/ Transfer belt
Figure 3-422 The Y, M, C, and Bk patterns are as shown in Figure 3-423.

Reading (CCD)
IT
I 6mm
r-L
I- 4mm -1
Figure 3423
3-76
CANON CLClQOQ REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JNW
The pattern
on the transfer belt is exposed by a LED and read by a special CCD.
\ Figure 3-424
The image data is sent to the DC controller, and a histogram (Figure 3-425) is prepared for both main and sub scanning directions. The coordinates of the center of the pattern is computed based on the data. In the case of Figure 3-425, the center in the main scanning direction is the 128th pixel and that in the sub scanning direction is the 130th line.
CCD array
I 256th pixel
r Feeding direction \I
128th pixel
III
0th pixel Accumulated value
Figure 3-425
3-77
This correction is executed at the following timing: 1 When the power switch is turned on. 2 When the Copy Start key is pressed after a specific period of time* following a press on the powerswitch. *Every two hours after 20 min, 40 min, 60 min, 90 min, and 120 min. 3 After jamming. 4 When activated in service mode. The pattern is formed as follows: When the power switch is turned on, the Y pattern is formed as soon as the fixing temperature reaches 110C; then, the M pattern is formed after a specific period of time has passed (photosensitive drumto-drum distance and pattern interval of 7 mm; for the C and Bk patterns, see Figure 3-427). Thereafter the Y pattern is formed as soon as the photosensitive drum completes a half rotation. When a total of i sets of patterns have been made (Y, M, C, Bk), the average of the data values is computed. The reading by the CCD is synchronized with the periods of time that pass following the generation of the Y image print enable signal.
Power switch ON
Potential control
Bk image print enable signal (BkPE) Pattern read signal (CCDRD) Y M C Bk
Figure 3-426
M -________ I
I 1
C _________ I
I I
Bk -__----_
+_: --_----_J
+I
_-----_-J
I_ 4mm-+-7mm +4mm--+-7mm-
I-Jmm __r
Figure 3-427
3-78
CANON CLClQQQ RW.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
The pattern reading assembly is equipped with a shutter (Figure 3-428) to prevent soiling with toner. The shutter is driven by the shutter drive motor, and the open/closed positions detected by the shutter open/closed sensor.
Shutter closed sensor /
Figure 3-428
See Figure 3-429 for the sequence of operations. In sync with the image position correction movement, the shutter drive motor remains on for 5 set to move the shutter to the open position. After reading eight sets of patterns, the shutter drive motor remains on for 5 set once again to move the shutter to the closed position.
M C Bk 1 St se1
M C Bk 8th set
Figure 3-429
If the shutter open sensor dose not detect the light-blocking plate when the shutter must open while the motor is at rest, E194-0001 will be indicated on the control panel. If the shutter must close, E194-0002 will be indicated on the control panel.
3-79
3. Correcting the Image Skew

The image is likely to be placed askew if the center of the pattern is different between the rear and the front. (In the case of Figure 3-430, the angle 8 is not 0.) Here, correction is made so that the angle 0 will be closer to O.The correction is made by changing the tilt of the image position correction mirror, thereby changing the scanning angle of the laser beam (Figure 3-431).
Feeding direction
Front
Figure 3-430
In the case of Figure 3-430, the image position correction mirror is rotated in the direction shown in Figure 3-431 so that the scanning angle will be horizontal.
Laser unii
osition correctlon mlrror
Figure 3-431
3-80
4. Correcting a Discrepancy in Reproduction Ratios

If the distances between centers (Lm and Ly in Figure 3-432) are different, the reproduction ratio in the main scanning direction is likely to be incorrect. Here, correction is made so that Ly will be closer in value to Lm.
Figure 3-432
The correction is made by shifting the image position correction mirror horizontally, thereby changing the length of the optical path for the laser beam (Figure 3-433). In the case of Figure 3-432, the length of the optical path is increased, thereby increasing the width of scanning.
Polygon mirror JI
Image position correction - - - mirror
P&l j d=a ipffb? I I I I
1 Yedrum
Image positlon comcHon mirror
I !
Figure 3-433
3-81
5. Correcting a Discrepancy in the Main Scanning Direction

If the coordinates of the centers at the front and the rear are different (in Figure 3-434, AY is not 0), the position where images are started in the main scanning direction is likely to have a discrepancy. Correction is made so that AY will be closer to 0. (In the case of Figure 3-434, the start of Y will be delayed to correspond to the start of W
--i
Feeding direction :1
Figure 3-434 The correction is made by changing the read timing (Tl in Figure 3-435) for the Y, C, and Bk video signals. In the case of Figure 3-434, Tl is extended, thereby delaying the start of the Y image.
Y BD signal (YBD) Y main scanning direction sync siyal (YSYNC) Y read enable signal (YRE)
It
,I
Figure 3-435
ED delecilon PCB
Clock generatlon
CRE. BkRE YRE. MRE
WE
,
Y,M
j
Msmoty lw maln
u Video slgnal Y,M
- scanntng sync (FIFO)
ir
The read tlmlng Is varkd at points lndkxted by bmad amws
Figure 3-436
3-82
CANON CLCl909 REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME
AU JAPOU)
6. Correcting a Discrepancy in the Sub Scanning Direction

If the coordinates of centers in the pattern are different (in Figure 3-437, AX is not 0), the image start position in the sub scanning direction is likely to have a discrepancy. Correction is made so that AX will be closer to 0. (In the case of Figure 3-437, the Y start position will be advanced until it is the correct position.)
Correct center
Feeding direction1
Y-l
Figure 3-437
The correction is made by varying the read enable signal for the Y, C, and Bk video signals (T2 of Figure 3-438). In the case of Figure 3-437, T2 is extended to delay the timing for the Y image start.
Image leading signal (ITOP)
iT2,; , I
I
1st page
Y read enable signal (YMRE)
Y print enable signal (YPE)

0
lrnage area
j 3
Y print area signal (YFRM)
Figure 3-438
3-83
V. IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

A. Outline
The functions of the image formation system covers the following: l Controls the drum surface potential (controls primary charging assembly grid bias/developing bias) l Controls gradation correction (laser output control) l Controls primary corona current l Controls pre-primary corona current l Controls developing bias l Controls toner supply l Detects Bklcolor toner density l Controls transfer current l Controls separation corona current Feedback is obtained by the following sensors: Environment Sensor Measures the temperature/humidity inside the machine. (Corrects the grid bias, separation charging bias, and transfer blade bias.) Potential Sensor Measures the photosensitive drum surface potential. (Corrects the grid bias and developing bias.) Color Toner Density Sensor Measures the toner density in the developer. (Supplies color toner.) SALT Sensor Measures the toner density on the photosensitive drum. (Supplies black toner.) Original Exposure CCD (PASCAL) Measures the toner density on copies by the CCD. (Corrects the grid bias, developing bias, and laser output.)
DC controller PCS
PASCAL
su \\J
SALT sensor Color toner den&y sensor
Wure 3-501
3-84
The following five PCBs are used for supplying high voltage to each high-voltage unit: 1 HVTl Supplies a DC bias to the transfer blade/internal static eliminating roller. 2 HVT2 Supplies a DC bias to the primary charging system. 3 HVT3 Supplies a DC/AC bias to the developing cylinder. Supplies a DC bias to the stray toner collection electrode plate. 4 HVT4 Supplies a DC/AC bias to the separation charging unit. 5 HVT5 Supplies a DC bias to the pre-fixing charging unit. The external static eliminating roller is grounded in relation to the internal static eliminating roller. 1 For details, see the appropriate pages.
Pre-exposure lamp DC+AC bias
Developing cylinder
DCbiasF
Pre-fixing assembly
External static eliminating
Figure 3-502
COPYRIGHT (D 1997 CANON INC.
3-85
6. Basic Sequence of Operations (image formation system)

Power switch ON I.7 1 NfvlUPfl 1
18O*C i7 STBY
Copy Start key ON .i-7 V
CNTR
COPY
LSTR
I
Drum motor
1 STBY I
Separation charging bi Pm-fixing charging bias
I
For developing bias,
DC+AC - DC
Figure 3-503
3-66
3. OPERATIONS AND TIMING D
C.
Stabilizing Images
Primary charging assembly Change in chargin characteristics of8 eveloper n
1. Outline
Copy images change over time for the following factors: Change in the amount of charging by the primary charging assembly. Change in the sensitivity of the photosensitive drum. Change in the charging characteristics of the developer.
n
Photosensitive
Deterioration
Developing assembly
in sensitivity
Figure 3-504 To ensure stable images in spite of these factors, the CLClOOO provides an image stabilizing control mechanism. When the power switch is turned on, the appropriate grid and developing biases are determined with reference to the data from the potential sensor; during copying, the grid bias is corrected based on the data from the environment sensor. The grid bias and the developing bias are corrected and the laser output is corrected based on the correction data from PASCAL (explained later).
DC controller PCS
+2 / PotentialyWol
II (7
Laser output Environment sensor Potential sensor ( Photosensitive ) p Delerrnlnes grid bias (Vg) and developing bias (Vdc)
)f$$zyJ~
SALT sensor
Figure 3-505
3-87
2. Controlling the Drum Surface Potential

a. Outline The CLCXOOO measures the drum surface potential to control the level of the grid and the developing biases as shown in Figure 3-506. When the power switch is tuned on, the appropriate grid and developing biases are determined so as to obtain an ideal contrast potential (initial potential control); thereafter, the appropriate grid bias is determined each time the Copy Start key is pressed, thereby correcting changes over time (potential correction).
1+ PowersjitchON
I I I t
Corrects grid bias (Vg)
Potential control
Figure 3-506 See the pages that follow for details of each control mechanism. The timing of control is as follows: Initial Potential Control l If the temperature of the fixing roller is 110C or less when the power switch is turned ON. Potential Correction l Each time the Copy Start key is pressed.
3-88
b. Initial Potential Control Under this control, ideal grid and developing biases are determined as shown in Figure 3-507. The grid bias (Vg) of the primary charging assembly is set to two different voltages as in Figure 3-508 to measure the dark area potential (Vd: 00 activation of laser) and the light area potential (VL: full activation of laser).
Power switch turned ON
Video signals set to OOH and FFH
vg-VdWL characteristic shown in Figure S-508 computed based on measurements
Grid bias (Vg) and developing bias (Vdc) computed so as to obtain selected contrast potential 7 Contrast potential computed by PASCAL Copy Start key ON
VL
Vgl(-3OOV)
Vg2(-7OOV)
Figure 3-507
Figure 3-508
Subsequent copying operations are executed using the grid bias and the developing bias determined as discussed; the timing of measurement is as follows:
Power switch ON
Drum motor
Flgure 3-509
COPYRIGHT CQ 1997 CANON INC.
3-89
The DC component of the grid and the developing biases is determined based on the Vg-Vd and VgVl characteristics obtained through drum surface potential measurement and the target contrast potential computed by PASCAL as follows: The developing bias DC (Vdc) curve is obtained from the Vd characteristic curve. The potential between Vdc and VL in Figure 3510 is the contrast potential.
Potential mw4
Figure 3-510 The point identical to the target contrast potential is detected, and the point is used to obtain the target value of the grid and developing biases; in the case of Figure 3-5111, Vi and V2 are target values.
Potential (negative) VI
--/
Gtld bias
v2
j__&
------_---__WC
eJ0 j
VL
Figure 3-511 The measurement data for the surface potential may be checked in service mode.
1 Operation/inspection mode (FUNCTION) 1 #8 Photosensitive drum potential measurement (EPC) Item voo-3oov voo-7oov VFF-3OOV VFF-700V Description Surface potential at 00 activation Surface potential at 00 activation Surface potential at full activation Surface activation at full activation Table 3-501 Reference 280 to 380 480 to 620 35 to 145 40 to 190
3-90
COPYRIQHT (0 1997 CANON INC.
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTEO IN JAPAN (IMPAIME
AU JlrwN)
c. Potential Correction Under this control mechanism, correction is made to the grid and developing biases to compensate for the changes occurring over time as follows.
I
I
Copy Start key ON
+
VD measured with reference to VD
and VD measured newly to correct Vg and Vdc
Figure
3-512
Copy Start key ON v
1 STBYI
CNTR
COPY
Figure 3-513 d. Error Code EO51 Associated with Drum Surface Potential Control E061 is an error code associated with drum surface potential control. The CLClOOO executes drum surface potential control during multiple initial rotation at power-on and determines the grid and developing biases for each color with reference to the measurements taken and the pre-determined contrast potential. The detail codes of E061 are explained below according to procedure for drum surface potential Control and procedure for computation: a. Procedure for Drum Surface Potential Control at Power-On b Procedure for Computation and Associated Detail Codes
COPYRIGHT 0 lW7 CANON INC.
3-91
a. Procedure for Drum Surface Potential Control at Power-On
I,
step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6
Drum rotation
Grid output
Laser output VFF output
I
Measures VL~ Measures VL~ Measures Volt Measures V02 Measures v1.1 Measures VL~ Measures V01 Measures Vo2
1st rotation Vgl (-3OOV) output 2nd rotation 3rd rotation vg2 (-7OOV) output 4th rotation j Computes based on measurements
voa output VFF output voo output
Table 3-502 b. Procedure for Computation and Associated Detail Codes *

step Checks Detail code xx01 xx02 Description of detail code Difference of the measured value of VDl is 30 V or more Difference of the measured value of VD2 is 30 V or more Difference of the measured value of VLl is 30 V or more Difference of the measured value of VL2 is 30 V or more VDl is 500 V or more and, in addition, VD2 is 900 V or more VDI is 90 V or more and, in addition, VD2 is 900 V or more VDl is 200 V or less and, in addition, VD2 is 600 V or less VDl is 150 V or less and, in addition, VD2 is 300 V or less VDl and VD2 both are 150 V or less
VDl , VD2, VLl, and VL2 are all 10 V or
Possible cause
Measured value check xx03 xx04
Potential circuit PCB (faulty) DC controller PCB (faulty)
xx10
Pre-exposure lamp (faulty) Pre-primary, primary charging assemMY (faulty) HV2 PCB (faulty) Primary charging assembly (faulty) HV2 PCB (faulty) Laser power adjustment (faulty) Laser unit (faulty) Video controller PCB (faulty) Prlmary charging assembly (faulty) HV2 PCB (faulty) Potential control PCB (faulty) Scanner (faulty) Laser unlt (faulty) Video controller PCB (faulty) Laser (fails to emit a beam) Laser unlt (faulty) Video controller PCB (faulty) Laser power adjustment (faulty) lntenslty at VFF (too high)
xx11 xx12 xx13 VDNL check (computed based on measured value) xx14 xx15
less Difference between VDl and VLl is 20 V or less and, In addltlon, VDl Is 206 V; or, difference between VD2 and VL2 is 20 V or less and, In addltion VDl is 600 V or more VLl is 200 V or more and VL2 Is 406 V or more
xx16
xx17
Table 3-503
3-92
CANON CLClWO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTEO IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Step
Checks Vg check (computed based on measured value)
Detail code xx22
Description of detail code Computed value of Vg is upper limit (950 V) or more Computed value of Vg is lower limit (250 V) or less VOO is upper limit (800 V) or more VOO is upper limit (950 V) or more VOO is lower limit (325 V) or less
Possible cause
Photosensitlve drum (deterioration) Laser output (inadequate)
xx26 xx20 4 Laser output value (VOO) check (cornputed based on measured value) xx23 xx25
Photosensitive drum (deterioration) Laser output (inadequate) Laser output,(excessive) Grid plate (faulty) Photosensitive drum (deterloration) Laser output (inadequate)
Developing bias check (computed based on measured value) Laser output (VFF) check (computed based on measured value)
xx21 xx24 xx27 xx28 xx30 xx31 xx32 xx33 xx34
VDC is upper limit (750 V) or more VDC is lower limit (950 V) or more VFF is upper limit (700 V) or more VFF is lower limit (0 V) or more VDi is upper limit (400 V) or more VDl is lower limit (200 V) or less VD2 is upper limit (800 V) or more VD2 is lower limit (500 V) or less VLl is upper limit (200 V) or more VL2 is upper limit (400 V) or more VL2 is lower limit (0 V) or less Difference between previous VD and newly computed VD is 30 V or more Difference between previous VG and newly computed VG is 30 V or more VOO is upper limit (950 V) or more
_
Laser output (excessive) Grid plate (faulty)
Photosensitive drum (deterioration) Laser power adjustment (faulty) Laser unit (faulty) Video controller PCB (faulty)
VDNDL check (computed based on measured value)
xx35 xx36 xx50
xx51
Potential control PCB (faulty) DC controller PCB (faulty)
xx52
xx53
VOO is lower limit (325 V) or less
Photosensitive drum (detertoratlon) Laser shutter (faulty operatlon) Laser power adjustment (faulty) Laser unit (faulty) Video controller PCB (faulty)
Table 3-504
COPYAIQHT 8 1997 CANON INC.
3-93
3. Controlling the Development Characteristics (SALT) a Outline

The printing density changes over time because of the following factors: Deterioration of the developer l Deterioration of the photosensitive drum l Changes in the environment To make up for the changes, the density of the density pattern formed on the photosensitive drum is measured by the SALT sensor, and the toner supply period is corrected based on the resulting measurements.
l
DC controller
Transfer belt
Figure 3-514
Dens&v oattem
Y-1
yTnsitive dNm
A Fulcrum
Photo diode for direct light lntenslty measurement
Figure 3-515
3-94
COPYAIOHT @ 1997 CANON INC.
CANON CLClOOo REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME
AU JrrPoN)
The toner density is measured by the SALT sensor as shown in Figure 3-516. When single copies are made, measurements are taken after each copying run; during continuous copying, measurements are taken when all copies have been made. However, if the copy count is set to 100 or higher, measurements are taken after each 100 copies have been made.
Making 210 copies

Density v measurement for SALT
,#;~::~::::.::
1st
Figure 3-516
The SALT sensor measures the density of toner, and computations are made to find out whether the current toner density is higher or lower in comparison with the ideal density. The results of computations are used to correct the toner supply amounts for the upcoming cepying operations.
Copy Start key ON COPY LSTR To$er density measurement I for SALT Copy Start key ON /I v COPY STBY \\ 1
/J
LSTR
STBY
Figure 3-516A
CANON CLClOw REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME
AU JAWN)
3-95
4. Controlling the Gradation Characteristics (PASCAL)

a. Outline The relationship between the output of the laser and the image density is as shown in Figure 3-517. In user mode, you can operate the CLCl 000 so that it actually develops, transfers, fixes, and outputs a solid patch and a 64-gradation halftone pattern for each color and then reads them by the CCD of the reader unit. The density data of the solid patch is used to obtain a contrast potential, and the 64-gradation halftone density data is used to find out the actual gradation characteristics; all these findings are used for correction on the laser output so as to enable ideal gradation characteristics. b. Operations For how to use user mode, see Chapter 1. I 1 In user mode, generate Auto Gradation 0 255 Correction Test Print 1 (halftone and solid Figure 3-517 patch; Figure 3-518). Referring to the halftone area of the generated Test Print 1, check for differences in density and faults in images; if an error is found, make adjustments according to the Basic Image Adjustment Procedure. If no error is found, operate so that the reader unit reads the solid images. The data collected by reading the solid images on the Test Print is used to determine the contrast potential. In user mode, generate Auto Gradation Correction Test Print 2 (64 gradations for each color; Figure 3519). Here, the contrast potential determined in 2 above is used. Operate so that the generated Test Print 2 is read by the reader unit. At this time, the CLCl 000 prepares a graph of output values and reading values (Figure 3-517), thereby determining the correction value to ensure ideal. gradation characteristics.
Halftone output by YMCK
K solid Y solid C solid M solid
E!!E!& Figure 3-518 (Test Print 1) Figure 3-519 (Test Print 2)
3-96
CANON CLCllW REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTEO IN JAPAN (IMPRIME
AU JAfUnj
3. OPERATIONS AND TtMlNG m
D. Primary Charging Assembly

Figure 3-520 shows the construction of the primary charging assembly. The charge current for the primary corona wire and the pre-primary corona wire and the grid bias is controlled by the control signal from the DC controller. The change current for the primary corona wire is constant, and the grid bias is varied to control the drum surface potential.
1. Outline
DC controller PCB
---
Figure 3-520
3-97
2. Controlling the Primary Corona Current

Figure 3-521 shows the current that controls the primary corona current, and the circuit has the fol_ lowing functions: l Turns ON/OFF the primary corona current. l Executes constant current control. The primary corona current is turned on and off by the primary corona current drive signal (HVPR), and the mechanism is as follows:
The transformer is driven. Corona current sent to the primary charging assembly. The output of the primary corona current is monitored with reference to its current, and the data is fed back to the variable width pulse oscillator, thereby ensuring that the primary corona current remains constant. If an overcurrent, because of leakage or example, is detected, the OC signal forces off the pulse output. When such occurs, the primary corona current will remain OFF for 20 ms and then will return automatically.
> f _I ,
DC controller
HVT2-1 I Corona current
Variable width pulse oscillator circuit
Transformer I
Figure 3-521
3-98
CANON CLClWtl REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPONI
3. Controlling the Grid Bias

Figure 3-523 shows the circuit that controls the grid bias, and the circuit has the following functions: 1. Controls the voltage. 2. Detects overcurrent. The grid bias is controlled by the grid bias control signal (HVGR) as follows: Ibut in the range of HVGR+OV to 12V 1 An output voltage suited to voltage of HVGR is generated by the transformer.
I
A soecific voltaae is aoolied to the grid. 1 The changes in the grid bias generated to suit the grid bias control signal (HVG) are as shown in Figure 3-522.
1
12v 11v
ov
I -2OOV Grid bias
I -950v
Figure 3-522 The output of the grid bias is monitored with reference to its voltage, and the data is fed back to the current control circuit. The feedback signal is used to ensure a specific level of grid bias. If an overcurrent is detected, because of leakage for example, the OC signal will turn on CM, thereby forcing off the pulse output. When such occurs, the grid bias will remain off for 20 ms and then will return automatically.
DC controller PCB Potential
sensor
Environment sensor > 3
HVT2-1 Grid bias
Current control circuit
Grid
I
Voltage d e t e c t i o n clrcult
. . . . P
0
3-99
Figure 3-523
4. Controlling the Pre-Primary Charging

Figure 3-524 shows the circuit that controls pre-primary charging current, and the circuit has the following functions: 1 Turns ON/OFF the pre-primary corona current. 2 Executes constant current control, The pre-primary corona current is turned off and on by the pre-primary corona current drive signal (HVPPR) as follows: Input in the range of HVPPR+OV to 12V
data from
(Correction is
executed each time the Copy Start key is pressed based on the environment sensor.)
An output voltage suited to voltage of HVGR is generated by the transformer. 1 The pulse output drives the transformer.
.
Corona current that suits the voltage of HVPPR is generated. The output of the pre-primary current is monitored with reference to its current value, and the data is fed back to the variable pulse oscillator circuit. The feedback signal is used to ensure a specific level of pre-primary corona current. If overcurrent, because of leakage for example, is detected, the pulse output is forced off; the pre-primary corona current will remain OFF for 20 ms and thereafter will return automatically. .
DC controller PCB
I
HVTP-1 Corona current
r
detection circuit
Pre-primary charging assembly u
Figure 3-524
3-100
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPW
5. Primary Charging Wire Cleaning

The CLClOOO is equipped with an automatic cleaning mechanism for the primary charging wire. The mechanism turns on to clean the wire under the following conditions: The temperature of the fixing assembly is 165C or less when the power switch is turned on. l l When the cleaning mechanism is activated in user mode. l When 5000 copies have been made since the previous cleaning operation.
Primary charging wire cleaning motor

(M24Bk,C,M,Y)
Cleaning pLcl
Figure 3-525 When the control signal from the DC controller is M24FW=l, M24RV=O, the primary charging wlre cleaning motor (M24) is rotated clockwise for about 13 set; then, when M24FW=0, M24RV=l, the motor is rotated counterclockwise for about 13 sec. This sequence of operations is the same for all colors.
COPYRl(IHT 8 1991 CANON INC.
CANON CLCIOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PFUNTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-l 01
E. Developing Assembly 1. Outline

The CLCl 000 is equipped with four photosensitive drums, and a developing assembly is fixed in position for each drum for development of Y, M, C, and Bk. The developing cylinder for each color is driven by the developing motor installed for the respective color. Toner is supplied to developing assemblies differently among Y, M, and C developing assemblies and Bk assembly. In the case of the Y, M, and C developing assemblies, infrared light is shone on the toner layer on the developing assemblies and the reflected light is measured to determine the amount of toner to supply; on the other hand, in the case of the Bk developing assembly, video signals representing the Bk component and the output of the SALT sensor are used to compute the amount of toner to supply. (See Measuring Color Toner Density and Measuring Black Toner Density, respectively.)
Pick-up motor
Photosensitlve drum
Bk developing motor
C developing motor
M developlng motor
Y developlng motor
Figure 3-526
3-102
CANON CLCIOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPAIME AU JAfON)
2. Controlling the Developing Bias

The developing bias applied to the developing cylinder is a combination of an AC bias and a DC bias. A DC bias is generated by the transformer on the HVT3A, and an AC bias is generated by the high-voltage transformer 3A based on fl kV generated by the transformer on the high-voltage transformer 38. (The AC bias is generated so that it assumes the wave forms shown in Figure 3-528.) Both DC and AC biases are controlled by control signals from the DC controller for application. The DC bias to the stray toner collecting electrode is generated by the high-voltage transformer 3B and sent in response to control signals.
DC controller PCB
I
Control signal 4 HVTBA
n +lkV ,-1kV
HVT3B
++++
Transformer for +l kV Ifl
Transformer for -1 kV Transformer or stray toner collecting electrode
Y @ii HVT3A +lkV - Transformer for DC -1kV
Figure 3-527
AC bias
ov -
Change by DC bias
k
3-103
Figure 3-528
Figure 3-529 shows the circuit that controls the developing bias, and the circuit has the following functions: HVT3-8 l Generates high voltage for AC bias l Generates timing signals for AC bias generation HVT3-A l Turns on and off the DC bias l Generates AC bias l Turns on and off the AC bias l Controls the voltage for DC bias The AC bias is generated and turned on/off as follows:
1 Transformer drive signal HVON=l and developing AC bias enable signal HVACEN=l 1
The transformer is driven, and *l kV is sent to the AC bias generation circuit. 1 An AC bias is generated based on signals from the timing generation circuit. When the AC bias output signal HVAC=i, the AC bias is applied to each developing cylinder.
DC controller PCB
I
Transformer for -1 kV Tlmlng slgnal generatlon
Transformer for DC
/Ic/
ClICUlt
AC blas generation
1 f 1 I +L
I II
I I.
HVTBA (rear)
Flgure 3-529
3-104
The DC bias is turned on and off, and the voltage is controlled as follows: Developing bias enable signal (HVDCEN)=l
I
1 1 The DC bias output signal HVDC (between OV and 12 V) is sent to the voltage control circuit. 1 ) The output from the transformer is controlled to suit the voltage of HVDC and is applied to ) the developing cylinder. I The DC bias output signal (HVDC) and the developing bias enable signal (HVDCEN) have four channels (for each color), and each of the four channels is controlled independently. The changes in the developing DC bias according to different voltage values are as shown in Figure 3-530.
-2oov
-75ov Developing DC bias
Figure 3-530
3-105
3. Controlling the DC Bias for Stray Toner Collection

Figure 3-531 shows the circuit that controls the DC bias for stray toner collection, and the circuit has the following functions: l Turns on and off the DC bias for stray toner collection. l Executes constant current control. The stray toner collection DB bias is turned on and off by the stray toner collection DC bias drive signal (HVSRD) as follows: -HVSRD=l The variable width pulse oscillator circuit turns ON, and pulse output is sent tothe transformer. The transformer is driven. 1 A DC bias is applied to the stray toner collection 4 electrode. The output of the stray toner collection DC bias is monitored with reference to its current value, and the data is fed back to the variable width pulse oscillator circuit. This feedback ensures a constant level of DC bias.
DC controller PC6
>
24
HVT3
DC bias
I
Variable width pulse oscillator circuit
Transformer
To stray toner collection electrode
Figure 3-531
3-106
4. Supplying Toner
a. Outline Toner is supplied from the hopper based on the measurements taken of the toner density. Different methods are used to measure the density between Bk toner and Y, M, and C toners because of different toner characteristics. For Y, M, and C toners, the color toner density sensor is used to measure the density of the toner in the developer layer on the developing cylinder. As in the case of carriers, the Bk toner tends to absorb infrared light, and for this reason the density on the developing cylinder cannot be measured. The video signals carrying a Bk component are counted to find out the image density, thereby computing toner consumption. When copying operation ends, the SALT sensor measures the toner image on the photosensitive drum to find out the toner density.
DC controller PC0
SALT sensor
Figure 3-532 See Figures 3-533 and -534 for sequences used to measure Y, M, and C toners and the Bk toner; the supply operation is executed each time the measurement value falls below a specific value.
Measuring the Y, M, and C Toners Figure 3-533
Measurlng the Bk Toner Figure 3-534
COPYRlGHTO19WCANONINC.
CANONCLC1000REV.1MAY1997 PRlNTEOINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAWN)
3-l 07
b. Measuring the Color Toner Density The Y, M, and C developing assemblies each are equipped with a color toner density sensor inside them (Figure 3-535), and each sensor is used to measure the density of toner retained on its respective cylinder.
Color toner density sensor
.1;
Transfer bett
Figure 3-535 The mechanism of measurement is as follows: The CLCl 000s developer is a two-component developer consisting of carrier and toner. When exposed to infrared light, the color toner will reflect infrared light while the carrier will absorb it. In other words, when the amount of toner decreases because of consumption over time, the reflection of infrared light will decrease because of the changing toner/carrier ratio of the developer. Using an infrared diode, the toner/carrier ratio is computed from the intensity of the infrared light reflected by the developer on the developing cylinder. To make up for the deterioration occurring in the infrared diode and changes in temperature, the direct light is also measured at the same time.
Detection of
Reflected intensity signal
ect lntenalty
elgnal
tectlon of direct light
Figure 3-536
3-108
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1097 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAFON)
3. OPERATIONS AND TlYlNG -
The sequence of measurement is as follows: When the developer has been replaced upon installation or when the sensor has been replaced, you must set the initial values for the reflected light and the direct light in service mode. (See the Service Handbook.) During copying operation that follows, the LED is turned ON to read the reflected light and the direct light occurring when the developing cylinder has rotated, thereby computing the toner density with reference to the difference between the initial value and the measured value.
Sets the initial values for the reflected light and the direct light. .
\
Perform after replacing the developer or sensors.
In response to a press on the Copy Start key, the developing cylinder rotates.
1*
AC
bias,tumsON.
1 L E D turnsON.
The direct light signal and
Computes the density with reference to the difference between the initial value and the measured value of the reflected light.
Figure 3-537
In the case of the M developing assembly, the LED ON signal (LEDON) turns on the LED inside the sensor. The LED intensity is kept to a specific value by controlling the current to the LED so that the intensity of direct light (FIEF-M level) remains the same. By comparing the reflected intensity (SGNL-M) and its initial value, a voltage corresponding to the density of the toner is computed and used as the toner density signal. The intensity of the LED changes over time or according to the ambient temperature. The degree of deterioration is computed by comparing the initial value and the intensity of direct light at time of measurement and is used as the correction value when measuring the density of toner.
DC controller
Detection of
Toner supply signal
-0
cL Toner supply clutch
Cylinder
Figure 3-538
3-109
Each measurement data unit may be checked in service mode. [Control display mode (DISPLAY) 1 Developer density (DENS) item SGNL-Y SGNL-M SGNL-C REF-Y REF-M FIEF-C
I
Description Toner layer reflection intensity Toner layer reflection intensity Toner layer reflection intensity Surface activation at full activation Surface activation at full activation
Reference 700 to 912 700 to 912 700 to 912 377 to 848 377 to 848
I Surface activation at full activation
I 377 to 848
Table 3-505
3-110
c. Supplying Color Toner If the results of measuring the toner density indicate that the density assembly is below a specific level, the DC controller sends the toner supply signal to turn on the toner supply clutch. As a result, the drive of the Pick-up motor moves through the toner supply screw to supply toner to the developing assembly. This operation is executed while the developing cylinder is rotating after measuring the density of toner. The duration of toner supply, i.e., during which the toner supply clutch remains on, varies depending on the toner density signal.
Toner level signal (TS4,TSS,TSG) \
Toner level detection signal (YTEP,MTEP*,CTEP)
rror detection sensor (TSl ,TS2,TS3) Error detection slgnal (YTEP,MTEP,CTEP)
DC controller PCB
Toner supply clutch Toner supply signal (CL1 D,CL2D,CL3D)
Pick-up motor drive signal (MlOMD)
Pick-up motor
Flgure 3-539
3-111
Each hopper for color toner is equipped with a toner sensor, which is a piezoelectric oscillator. The front sensors (TS4, 5, 6) monitor the level of toner and, when the toner level falls below the sensor, issues the message ADD TONER on the control panel.
Toner level sensor -_-_-_____ --_.__-___
Figure 3-540 The rear sensors (error sensors TSI, 2, 3) look for sensor faults or damage to the stirring rod. If an error sensor (TSl, 2, 3) detects the absence of toner while the toner level sensor (TS4, 5, 6) detects the presence of toner, E020 will be indicated on the control panel when copying operation ends.
3-112
d. Detecting the Image Density Like carriers, the Bk toner absorbs infrared light, allowing the measurement of the density of the toner layer on the developing cylinder. Bk toner is supplied based on the amount of consumption computed with reference to the count of the video signals carrying a Bk component. As shown in Figure 3-541, the video signals from the image processor are counted to obtain a cumulative count by the video data counter.
Y,M,C,Bk ) signal
Video signal \ Y,M,C,Bk
L
L
L
Bk toner supply clutch (upper) Bk toner supply clutch (lower)
0 0
CL4 CL5
Toner supply signal 4
Cumulative count
1D
Figure 3-541
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY lW7 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-113
e. Measuring the Toner by the SALT Sensor To check the density of toner within the developer, a toner image is formed on the photosensitive drum after copying operation. This measurement of density is done by the SALT sensor (Figure 3-542) mounted to the side of the photosensitive drum. A density pattern is formed on the photosensitive drum, and infrared light is shone against the density pattern to measure the density with reference to the reflected light.
Toner supply signal
Toner supply clutch
-0
CL
SALT sensor
SALT sensor
SALT sensor
Transfer belt
SALT sensor
Figure 3-542 The changes in the LED intensity over time or caused by changes in ambient temperature are corrected in the same way as for color toner. Since the window of the sensor tends to become soiled with stray toner, correction is made for the dirt on the window also. The LED is turned on during last rotation after the Copy Start key is turned ON, and the light reflected by the surface of the photosensitive drum without a deposit of toner is read. The difference between the measured value and the initial value is used as a correction value when computing the density of the density pattern.
Detection of direct light PhotosensitIve drum Direct lntenstty sig
DetectIon of reflected light
Figure 3-543
3-114
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME
AU JAW4
The current to the LED is controlled so that the direct intensity (level of FIEF-S-K) is constant, thereby maintaining the intensity of the LED at a specific value.
DC controller PCB
Toner supply signal 4
CPU Ql
I-I
.Y n xNw_-3-lt
Detection of reflected light
Figure 3-544
When the developer has been replaced upon installation or a sensor has been replaced, set the initial values for the reflected light and the direct light in service rriode. (See the Service Manual.) Then, the following takes place after a copying run:
Initial values are set for the reflected light and the direct liaht. 1
Performed when replacing the developer or sensors.
After copying operation, post rotation starts. During copying operation, the density is measured with reference to video signals.
To prevent disrupting toner images.
I I
LED turns ON.
A density pattern is formed on the ohotosensltlve drum.
1
, Corrects for dirt on the wlndow. The light reflected by the surface of the drum Is read
1] The directTs:l and the reflected Ii ht s/ nal are read.
Computed based on the difference between the reflected light and the initial value. Various measurement data units may be checked & in service mode.
Figure 3-545
CANON CLClllOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-115
XI. SERVICE MODE

A. Outline
The CLClOOOs service mode is divided into the following six:
No.
1. Starting and Selecting Service Mode

. You cannot start service mode while the CLCl 000 is making copies. 1) Press the q key on the control panel. 2) Press the IZi and i keys (keypad) at the same time. 3) Press the q key. The screen shown in Figure 3-1101 appears.
l
Notation DISPLAY ADJUST FUNC
Description Control display mode Adjustment mode Function/inspection mode Options mode Test print mode
I
1 2 3
2. Ending Service Mode

Press the Reset key.
I I
4 5
I I
OPTION TEST
1 6 1 COUNTER ( Counter mode Table 3-1101
<M>
<s>
<R>

<F>
Figure 3-1101
COPYRKWT Q 1997 CANON INC.
3-205
DISP
m WINDOW-Y WINDOW-M XxXx XxXx
WINDOW-C WINDOW-K XxXx XxXx
Item WINDOW
Description Indicates the window soiling correction coefficient. The value decreases when the SALT sensor becomes soiled.
Remarks Normal if between 60 and 140.
3-216
CANON CLClOOO AEVV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5. EPOT (photosensitive drum surface potential control data)

<M> EPOT DISP
mBm m #m es> CR>

VOO-K xxx xxx VFF-K xXxXx VDC-K xxx VG-K xXxXx
<F>
voo-Y
xxx VFF-Y xxmx VDC-Y xxx VG-Y xXxXx
Voo-M
xxx VFF-M xXxXx VDC-M xxx VG-M xXxXx
voo-c
VFF-C xXxXx VDC-C xxx VG-C xXxXx
I_
Item VOO=Y/M/C/K
Description Indicates the target value for VD (with laser output at 00). Indicates the optimum value computed by potential control. Indicates the target value for VL (with laser output at off). Indicates the optimum value computed by potential control. Indicates the target value for Vdc (developing bias DC component). Indicates the optimum value computed by potential control. Indicates the target value for Vg (grid bias). Indicates the optimum value computed by potential control.
Remarks Unit: V Optimum value: 350 to 800 Unit: V Optimum value: 50 to 300 Unit: V Optimum value: 200 to 650 Unit: V Optimum value: 300 to 800
VFF=Y/M/C/K
VDC=Y/M/C/K
VG=YlM/ClK
The measurements of VOO and VFF may be checked by EPC under FUNC.
COPYRIQHT Q lQQ7 CANON INC.
3-217
6. SHD/BOF (shading/black offset data)

:.
.)
<M>
DISP
SHD/BOF
4%
 READY BOARD-G xxx TARGET-G xxx BOF-G xx xx
<F>
BOARD-R xxx TARGET-R xxx BOF-R xx xx
m BAR-CODE
Item BAR-CODE
Description Indicates the bar code value of the standard white plate.
Remarks The value is indicated only after executing FUNC+CCD+AUTO+ADJ. (Thereafter, the value will not be indicated at power on/off.) Initial value: 211
BOARD-B/G/R
Indicates the output of each CCD when the standard white plate is read. (output value after A/D conversion) Indicates the shading target value. Indicates the output of each CCD when the scanning lamp is off. (odd bit/even bit)
TARGET-B/G/R BOF-B/G/R
Initial value: 233
3-218
COIYRIOHT 0 1997 CANON INC.
7. SENSOR (sensor/DC controller input port)

<M> SENSOR
DISP mmm m 8OOOOOH 8OOOOlH 800002H 800003H 800004H 800005H 43 CR> READY 8010OOH 801001H 801002H 801003H 801004H 801005H <f> READY
<F>
xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxx)(xxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
xxxwxxx xIowaxx xmxxxxx x)(xxxxxx xxxxmmx xxxxuxx
xnxxxxx MooooM xxxxxux xxxxxxxx xxxmxxx xxxmxxx
802OOOH 802OOlH 802002H 802003H 802004H 802005H
Item 800000H I 808004H
Description
Remarks
Indicates the input ports of the DC controller PCB. (800000H through 808004H)
3-219
NO1
er power error
800002H
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
J2213-Al J2218-A10 J2223-87 J2226-Al J2213-A5 J2208-61 J2226-A13 J2213-A8
Fixing motor overcurrent detection Polishing/oil removing motor PLL error Holding tray drive motor PLL error Waste toner feeding motor PLL error Fixing motor PLL error Scanner motor PLL error Drum motor PLL error Pick-up motor PLL error
Error: 1 Error: 1 Error: 1 Error: 1 Error: 1 Error: 1 Error: 1 Error: 1
3-220
COPYRlOHTQ1997
CANONINC.
CANONCLClOOOAEV.1 MAY1997 PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRlMEAUJAPON)
NO2
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
J2225-85 J2223-A14 J2218-82 J2224-A2 J2223-B12 J2209-A14
Reserved Buffer unit connection Paper deck connection Transfer unit connection Holding tray unit connection Fixing knob connection Fixing assembly connection Connected: 0 Connected: 0 Connected: 0 Connected: 0 Connected: 0 Connected: 0
3-221
I ~
NO3 Remarks
Reserved Transparency sensor (OHPS) Pick-up vertical path 3 paper sensor (PS26) Pick-up vertical path 2 paper sensor (PS25) Pick-up vertical path 1 paper sensor (PS21) Registration paper sensor (PSl) Holding tray front feeding sensor 2 (PS9) Holding tray front feeding sensor 1 (PS8) Holding tray paper sensor 2 (PS31) Holding tray paper sensor 1 (PS30) Delivery sensor (PS34) jam detection Internal delivery sensor (PS35) jam detection Separation sensor (PS15) jam detection Registration rear paper sensor (PS14) jam detection Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Delivery vertical path 1 paper sensor (PS36) Buffer unit inlet paper sensor (PS3) For factory Paper present: 0 IPaper present: 1 Paper present: 1 Paper present: 1 Paper present: 1 Paper present: 1 Paper present: 0 Paper present: 1 Paper present: 0 Paper present: 1 Paper present: 1 Paper present: 0 Paper present: 1 Paper present: 1
4 3 2 1 0 801001H 7 6 5
J2207-A14 J2222-812 J2222-89 J2222-B5 J2207-A13 J2214-85 J2214-82 J2211-A10
4 J221 l-A9 3 J221 I-Al 1
2 J221 l-85 1 0 801002H 7 6 J2218-Bl J2218-A16 -
I5I4 3 J221 l-B8
I 2 I J2225-83
1 0 J2224-A5
I Paper present: 1
Paper present: 0
Holding tray flapper assembly jam detection
3-222
COPYRltUiT 0 1997 CANON INC.
CANON CLClDOO REV.1 MAY 1937 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
NO4
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY lQQ7 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-223
NO5 Address 802OOOH Connector

1 7 1 J2205-97
Description For factory For factory For factory For factory

I
Remarks l-
6 1 J2205-95 5 1 J2205-93 4 1 J2205-91

I I
II -.
I
3 1 J2206-67 2 1 0 802001H 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 802002H 7 J2206-63 J2206-A9 J2230-6 J2212-813 J2212-B12 J2212-811 J2212-810 -
For factory For factory For factory For factory Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Bk toner level sensor (upper; TS4) C toner level sensor (TS3) M toner level sensor (TS2) Y toner level sensor (TSI) Reserved
I Reserved I Reserved
Below: 1 Below: 1 Below: 1 Below: 1
I6I-
I5I4 3 2 1 0 J2209-Al4 J2209-Al2 J2223-810 J2218-A8
I -
Reserved Upper fixing web length sensor (PS36) Fixing oil level sensor (OSI) Waste toner lock detecting switch (SW4) Transfer belt cleaning web length sensor (PSI 1) Web absent: 1 Oil absent: 1 Locked: 0 Web absent: 1
3-224
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 19g7 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Address 802003H 7 6
I
11
Connector 1 J2218-A7 J2219-Bl
Description Transfer belt cleaning web rotation sensor (PSlO) Transfer belt home position sensor (PS16)
Remarks While in rotation, alternately 1 and 0. Detected: 1 Detected: 1
I 5 I J2219-88 I 4 I J2219-87
I
( Transfer belt edge sensor 4 (rear; PS20)

1
I I
1 Transfer belt edge sensor 3 (front; PS19)
) Detected: 1
I 3 I J2219-83
1 2 1 J2219-82
Transfer belt edge sensor 2 (rear; PS18)

I Transfer belt edge sensor 1 (front; PS17) 1 Transfer belt lifter sensor 2 ((PS13)
I I
Detected: 0
I Detected: 0
I 1 I J2218-A6
I
I
Down: 1
I
0
I I
J2218-A5
Transfer belt lifter sensor.1 (PS12)

I I Pattern reading CCD shutter (rear)
up: 1
I I Closed: 1
802004H 1 7 1 J2241-4
I 6 I J2241-7
5 4 3 2 1 0 802005H 7 -
Pattern reading CCD shutter (front) For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory I For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory For factory -
6l5 4 3 2
I
I-
1 0
COPYRlOHT01997
CANONINC.
CANONCLCIOOO
REV.lMAY1997
PRlNTEOINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
3-225
Table A Jam Location 1 2

1
Body
RF-1 I
Sorter
Table B Jam Code (high-order 2 digits)
01 02 10 11
1 Delay jam
F I
I Table C 01 02 03 04 31 32 33 34 61 62 63 64 65 66 67
Stationary jam Jam at power-on or when the front door, pick-up door, or delivery door is opened/closed. Jam when the front door, pick-up assembly door, or delivery door is opened/closed during copying operation. 2 Registration paper sensor Pick-up vertical path 1 sensor Pick-up vertical path 2 sensor Pick-up vertical path 3 sensor Registration rear sensor Separation sensor Internal delivery sensor Delivery sensor Delivery vertical path sensor Delivery vertical path sensor 2 Duplexing unit reversal sensor Holding tray front feeding sensor 1 Holding tray front feeding sensor 2 Holding tray paper sensor 1 Holding tray paper sensor 2 PSl PS21 PS25 PS26 PS14 PS15 PS35 PS34 PS38 PS32 PS33 PS8 PS9 PS30 PS31
Table D Pick-Up Location
Duplexing unit Paper deck
3-236
COPYRIOHTO1~97CANONINC.
CANONCLCiDOO REV.1 MAY1997 PRlNTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
n 5th/6th Screen (E code) <M>

DISP m m <EOOO> <EOO4> <E013> <E020> <E023> <EO40> <EO41> <E050> <EO61> <EO62>
<s>
<E070> <E075> <E194> <E260>
<ib
READY
 READY
<F>
<M> JAM/ERR DISP m ERROR <HIST-O> EXXX <HIST-5 Exxx
<S> 314
<R> RE4DY
 READY
<F>
<HIST-l> EXXX <HIST-6> EXXX
<HIST-2> EXXX <HISTJ> Exxx
<HIST-3> EXXX <HISTB> EXXX
<HIST-4> Exxx
Item <CODE> <EOOO> <EOi 2> <E020> <E030> <E040> <E061> <E072> <E073> <HIST-O>
1
Description Indicates the appropriate error code (E) for the results of self diagnosis. Indicates detail codes for each error code. (See the descriptions on self diagnosis.)
Indicates a history of error codes (E). . HIST-0 is the most recent. Clears all error code histories.
<HI!%9> ERA-CLR
3-237
9. PRJ-INF (state of the projector)
I
DISP m
<M> PRJ-INF m CHANGER 0 T-MOVE 0
<s> TRAY 0 T-M-ERR 0 L-MOVE 0
<R> READY T-KIND 0 T-HP-ERR 0 M-EXCT 0 INITIAL
<t> READY T-SET 0 T-L-MOVE 0 L-POS 0 LOCAL
<F>
T-POS 0
LAMP-ERR 0
R/L 0 0
Item CHANGER TRAY T-KIND T-SET T-MOVE T-M-ERR T-HP-ERR T-L-MOVE T-POS L-MOVE
Description Indicates the presence/absence of a rotary changer. Indicates the presence/absence of a slide tray. Indicates the type of tray. Indicates if a slide is set.
I Indicates that the tray is moving.
State 1: Present 1: Present 1: 140 0: 80 1: Set

I 1: Moving
~ ~--I
I
Indicates an error in the mechanism that moves the tray.

I Indicates a tray home position error.
1: Error 1: Error 1: Moving 0: Home position 1: Increases by 1 1: Moving
indicates that the tray is moving (local). Indicates the position of the tray. Indicates that the lens is moving.
I Indicates the state of motor excitation.

L-POS LAMP-ERR Indicates the position of the lens. Indicates an open circuit in the lamp.
I 1: Excited
0: Home position 1: Open circuit 1: Processing 1: Operating 0: Remote 1: Local
I Indicates that initialization is under way.

LOCAL R/L Indicates local movement. Indicates remote/local mode.
3-238
10. RF-INF (RDF state)
<M> RF-INF
DISP m m STATUS-im DOG1 xx ERROR xx m ALARM-1 xx
<s> STATUS-2m DOC-2 xx JAM xx ALARM-2 xx
<R> READY STATUS-3m DOG3 xx
 READY STATUSd= DOG4 xx
<F> USER
ALARM-3 xx
ALARM-4 xx
Item STATUS-l/2/3/4 For R&D DOC-l/2/3/4 ERROR For R&D
Description
Indicates the error code sent by the RDF controller PCB. 01 Hequivalent of E401 02H:equivalent of E402 03H:equivalent of E403 04H:equivalent of E404 05H:equivalent of E405 06H:no corresponding error 07H:equivalent of E411 11 H:equivalent of E411 21 H:equivalent of E400 For R&D Indicates the alarm code sent by the RDF controller PCB. 01 H:re-circulating bar idle rotation .02H:not used 03H:separation failure 04H:separation skew 05H:not used
JAM ALARM-l /2l3/4
COPYRlQHTO1097 CANONINC.
CANONCLClOOO REV.lMAY1997 PRlNTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
3-239
11. SORT-INF (SORT state)
<M> SORT-INF <S> DISP m m STATUS-lu( ERROR xx ALARM-l xx m ALARM-2 xx STATUS-2= JAM xx
CR> READY STATUS-3xx
 READY STATUS_4u(
<F> USER
ALARM-3 xx
ALARM-4 xx
Item STATUS-l/2/3/4 For R&D ERROR JAM For R&D
Description
Indicates the jam code sent by the sorter controller PCB. 03H:feeding delay jam 02H:feeding stationary jam 03H:staple jam 04H:power-on jam 08H:door open jam (during feeding) 09H:door open jam (other than during feeding) Indicates the alarm code sent by the sorter controller PCB. ALARM-l 02H:overstacking ALARM-2 02H:staple jam 03H:stapler safety mechanism activation 04H:stapler overstacking 05Hmixed paper sizes (horizontal) 07H:stapler unit absent 08H:separation failure 0AH:staple absent ALARW3/4for future use
ALARM-l/2/3/4
3-240
COPYRIGHT@ 1997CANONINC.
CANONCLClOOO
REV.lMAY1~~7PRlNTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAU
JAPON)
12. BLT-DRFT (belt swing data display)

CM>
DISP B L T - D R F T <S> 4% BELT -- POS CENTER XXXX X X X X XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX X X X X XXXX

<F>
DIR B-->F FST FT0 B
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
FT0 BC. Time BT0 FC. Time TOTAL
XXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXXX XXXX
BST BT0 F
Item DIR
Description Indicates the present swing condition (direction) of the transfer belt. DIR B->F: moving (swinging) from rear to front F->B: moving (swinging) from front to rear Indicates the present condition (position) of the transfer belt. BELT_POS FRONT: near front CENTER: near center near rear BACK: Indicates the time required by the transfer belt between when it reaches the transfer belt end sensor (PS17, front) and when it leaves the sensor. Mos?&ent data 9y Second most recent data Third most recent data _r
State Unit: 0.1 set
BELT--POS
FST
Unit: 0.1 set
FTOB
Indicates the time required by the transfer belt between when it reaches the transfer belt end sensor PS17, front) and when it reaches the end sensor 2 I PS18, rear). xxxx fvlos:~~e~t data 3p Second most recent data Third most recent data Indicates the time required by the transfer belt between when it reaches the transfer belt end sensor 1 (PS18, rear) and when it leaves the sensor. xxxx fvlos!itent data 3p Second most recent data Third most recent data Indicates the time required by the transfer belt between when it reaches the transfer belt end sensor 2 (PS18, rear) and when it reaches the end sensor 1 (PS17, front). xxxx hIosFife!t data 97 Second most recent data Third most recent data
Unit: 0.1 set
BST
Unit: 0.1 set
BTOF
Unit: 0.1 set
3-241
Item F TO B C.Time
Description Indicates data (F TO B data minus FST data); time taken by the belt to move from front to back. F TO B C. Time 4 second most recent 9 third most recent Indicates data (B TO F data minus BST data); time taken by the belt to move from back to front. B TO F C. Time second most recent --?? T third most recent indicates data (F TO B data plus B TO F data); tjme taken by the belt to make a round trip.
State Unit: 0.1 set
B TO F C.Time
Unit: 0.1 set
TOTAL
Unit: 0.1 set
3-242
COPYRlOHTQ1~97CANONINC.
CANONCLClOOOREV.1MAY1997 PRINlEOINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
C. ADJUST (adjustment)
2
3
I I
ADJ-XY DOC-REC PROJ
1 Adjusts the image read start position.
1 Adjusts the original detection area/slide level. Adjusts the projector area. I Adjusts the editor. Adjusts the photosensitive drum surface potential contrast. Corrects the color balance (for user). Determines whether to use or not data obtained by auto gradation correction control and display of data related to auto gradation correction control. ADJ-MNISC (adjustments other than above)
I Adjusts the feeding position.
4
5 6 7
I ED/RF 1 V-CONT 1 COL-ADJ
PASCAL
ADJ-MISC
9 1 FEED-ADJ 10 1 REG-OFS 11 1 ENV-SET 12
1 ForR&D
1 Use it to set cassette heater operation conditions.
I HV-TR Y/M/C/K I Fine-adjusts transfer high-voltage output by condition.
13 1 HV-SP 14 15 HV-FS HV-EL
Fine-adjusts separation high-voltage output by condition. Use it to make fine-adjustments for the pre-fixing high-voltage output according to conditions. Use it to make fine-adjustments for the internal static eliminator high-voltage output according to conditions.
COPYRIOHT Q lM7 CANON INC.
3-243
1. ADJ-XY (image read start position adjustment)

<M> ADJ-XY mm m
CS> 
Item ADJ-X (Note 1)
Description Use it to make adjustments so that the image read start position (X direction, sub scanning direction) matches the reference point on the copyboard glass. Fine-adjusts the distance from the original scanner home position sensor to the read start position. Unit: Number of steps of the stepping motor. l Follow the instructions on the next page. Use it to make adjustments so that the image read start position (Y direction, main scanning direction) matches the reference point on the copyboard glass. Unit: Pixel l Follow the instructions on the next page. Use it to fine-adjust the point at which the standard white plate is measured for shading correction data. l Unit: Number of steps of the stepping motor. l Scratches or dirt, if any, on the standard white plate can cause conspicuous vertical white lines on copies. If such is noted, shift the point of measurement using ADJ-S.
Settings o-+400 (-3.9-+3.9mm) Unit: 0.11 mm (approx.)
ADJ-Y (Note 1)
-1 oo-+l OO (-2.5-+2Smm) Unit: 0.06mm (approx.)
ADJ-S (Note 1)
o-45 (O-4.8mm) Unit: 0.11 mm (approx.)
V+
(forward)
Polnt of measurement Standard white plate
I:ADJ-J
Adjusts the preparatory time for the scanner motor.
450-550 Unit: 0.1 msec (approx.)
Note 1: You must enter the appropriate value whenever you have replaced a PCB or initialized a RAM; record any new values on the service label for this purpose.
3-244
CANON CLCIOOO REV.1 MAY 1097 PRINTEO IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
n
+
Adjusting the Image Read Start Position You must check the point of retention (FUNC
ADJ-X
ATTRACT) before making the following adjustments: 1) Before starting service mode, turn OFF the original detection mechanism. 2) Select the <ADJ-XY> screen, and press the Copy Start key. . The appropriate copying modes will be set automatically, and a copy will be made with a shift of about 20 mm as shown in Figure 3704. 3) If any part of the image is missing, decrease the values of ADJ-X and ADJ-Y. 4) If an area outside the image is copied, increase the values of ADJ-X and ADJ-Y.
20
ADJ-Y
20 __I
ti
I-
Figure 3-1104
COPYRKiHT 8 1997 CANON INC.
3-245
2. DOGREC (original detection area/slice level)

<M>
D O C - R E C 4.b <ib R E A D Y R E A D Y
<F>
Item DA-XS DA-XE DA-YS DA-YE (Note 1)
Description Fine-adjusts the original detection area. The original must be placed correctly on the copyboard glass in original detection mode; if placed at an angle, the copies will have a black frame. To prevent the problem, set a value by which such frames will be erased.
-99-99
Remarks (O-6.3mm) Reference: X%16 XE=16 YS=16 YE=16 Unit=O.OGmm (approx.)
-_--
_-DAYS
Any changes to the value will affect the frame erasing width in original detection mode when the projector is used. DS-DOC DS-PRJ DS-OHP (Note 1) Adjusts the slice level for original detection. You may enter any value as the slice level for original detection. A higher value increases detection capability but tends to lead to wrong detection. DS-DOC:When detecting ordinary originals, DS-PRJ:When detecting the projection area with the projector in use, DS-0HP:When detecting film (6x6, 8x10) placed on the copyboard glass with the projector in use from the position of the reference sheet.
Note 1:
o-31 (Density level O-248) Reference: DS-DOG20 PRJ=28 OHP=22
The value will return to the standard value when the RAM is initialized, requiring re-input. Be SW9 to record any new value on the service label.
3-246
CANON CCC1000 REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JWON)
3. PROJ (projector area adjustment)

CM>
PRDJ <s> -CR> READY READY
<F>
Item PJRD-XS PJRD-XE PJRD-YS PJRD-YE
Description Fine-adjusts the read area if original detection mechanism is off with the projector in use or if original detection fails when the original detection mechanism is on. 4 --__----On copyboard glass
Settings 300-+300 (-19.0-+19.0mm) Ref. =0 For XSiXE, Unit: 0.11 mm (approx.) For YSNE, Unit: 0.06 mm (approx.)
xs
XE
On copy
XE
xs
COPYAIBHT 0 1997 CANON INC.
3-247
Item PJDA-XS PJDA-XE PJDA-YS PJDA-YE
Description Fine-adjusts the area from which measurements are taken for original detection when the original detection mechanism is on with the projector in use. 9 Use it also for the read area when the original detection mechanism is off in copyboard mode. The area for the standard value (0) is 5 mm inside the Fresnel lens.
l
Settings -99-+99 YS, YE (-6.3-+6.3mm) Unit: 0.06mm (approx.) XS, XE (-10.9~+10.9mm) Unit: 0.11 mm (approx.) (on copyboard glass) Reference: 0
.
P JCAR-X PJCAR-Y
Use it to adjust the film reading range when the original detection mechanism is off with the auto changer in use.
Settings: -100 to 100 Standard: 0
3-248
COPYRWT Q 1997 CANON INC.
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IYPRIME All JAPON)
4. ED/RF (editor/RF adjustment)

11 CR> 44 1 R 1 E )) 1 A CM> D ED/RF Y <s> l/2 R E A D Y
<F>
mm
ADJUST
m
xxx <TEMP-X> xxx xxxmm <TEMP-Y> xxx xxxmm <ED-X>
m xxx
<ED-Y> xxx xxxmm
d xxx
Item ED-MODE (Note 1)
Description Switches editor operation mode. 0: Normal operation 1: 1 -point input check 2: Continuous input check ~~~~.~~~~~~~~~~~~_~ 1 m 1 ~~~~;---.l pE---------.l
XXX ii I i._._._._._._. ._._.j i i._._._.-._.?E mmi i _._._._.-!F .!F!.j
Settings Standard: 0
EDADJ-X cTEMP-X> <ED-X> EDADJ-Y cTEMP-Y> <ED-Y> [Note 1)
mm meti4x;;;;:!
xXx
-99-+99 (-12.6-+12.6mm) Unit: 0.13mm (approx.) Reference: 0
input coordinate present values,

I
Post-correction computed values, mm converted values I In ut coordinate adjustment value for sub scanning direction $direction) from the Editor EDADJ-X ++i-+I L
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ 1 +
,ZDA,,J_Y
i-
LOOP-MB (Note 1)
Changes the processing method used to read images into memory for coloring in area specification/color creation. If the value is increased, filling gaps will be easier; too high a value, however, will result in bleeding. If the slice level adjustment value is increased for binarization used for reading images into memory for area specificationkolor creation, finer lines may be read.
O-3 Standard: 0
LOOP-TH (Note 1)
O-255 Standard: 192
3-249
Item MRK-MB (Note 1)
Description Changes the image data processing method used for reading images into memory for freehand/point specification. If the value is increased, filling gaps will be easier. Adjusts the slice level for binarization used for reading images into memory for freehand/point specification. If the value is increased, finer lines may be read.
Settings O-3 Standard: 0
MRK-TH (Note 1)
o-255 Standard: 128
Note 1: You must enter the appropriate value whenever you have replaced a PCB or initialized a RAM; record any new values on the service label for this purpose.
3-250
CANON CLClOOO MY.1 MAY lWW7 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPUN)
j 44 1
[[ )) 1
<M>
ED/RF
<S> 2/2
<I+

<F>
mm
ADJUST
m
d
x.x
mm
x.x mm
h x.x mm d X x.x mm
Item RFADJ-RX RFADJ-RY RFADJ-DX RFADJ-DY
Description Adjusts registration (with RF in use). Corrects registration when originals are picked up from the RF. Corrects in relation to main scanning direction+CCD read start position. Corrects in relation to sub scanning direction+original read start timing. RX + For correction in sub scanning direction when pick-up is from the RDF tray. RY + For correction in main scanning direction when pick-up is from the RDF tray.
Settings/remarks
o-99
Unit: RX, DX=O.l 1 mm (approx.) RY, DY=O.OGmm (approx.) Initial value RX, DX=O RY, DY=O For this mode, you must have finished: 1. Adjusting the original stop position and 2. Adjusting the horizontal registration.
(Note 1)
DX + For correction in sub scanning direction when pick-up is from the manual feeding tray (feeding assembly). DY + For correction in main scanning direction when pick-up is from the manual feeding tray (feeding assembly).
RX,
DX
o-99
Note 1:
You must enter the appropriate value whenever you have replaced a PCB or initialized a RAM; record any new values on the service label for this purpose.
CANON CM1000 REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-251
5. V-CONT (photosensitive drum surface potential contrast adjustment)
<M>
V-CONT
4% VCONT-M XxXx
CR> READY VCONT-C XxXx
<f> READY VCONT-K XxXx
<F>
mm VCONT-Y XxXx ADJUST VBACK-Y XxXx mmm
VBACK-M xmx
VBACK-C XxXx
VBACK-K XxXx
Item VCONT-Y/M/C/K
Description Indicates the present value of the target contrast potential.
Remarks
VBACK-Y/M/C/K ( Indicates the present value of de-fogging potential.
3-252
3. OPERATIONS ANDTIMING -
6. COL-ADJ (user color balance adjustment correction)
<M>
COL-ADJ
cs>
<R> READY
CP> READY
<F>
Item ADJ-Y/M/C/K (Note 1)
Description Corrects user color balance adjustment. m Be sure to set the setting for user color balance adjustment to 0 before using this mode. m Follow the image adjustment basic procedure. Adjusts light area density and color balance. ) Follow the image adjustment basic procedure. b If fogging is noted, decrease the value. To increase reproducibility of images with extremely low density, increase the setting.
Settings -8-+8 Standard: 0 t: Darker. -: Lighter -16-+16 Standard: Y=O M=2 c=o K=O Settings: -3 to + 3 Standard: 0 See the descriptions under OPTION+ R-OPT+MANAGE.
3FSTY/M/C/K [Note 1)
P-TBL-M C Y K
Note 1:
Use it to make fine adjustments so that the hues will be closer to the hues of offset printing. After comparing M/C/Y/K outputs against professionally (offset) printed material, if the print-out is lighter, increase the setting of PTBL-M/C/Y/K. if the print-out is darker, decrease the setting of PTBL-M/C/Y/K.
You must enter the appropriate value whenever you have replaced a PCB or initialized a RAM; record any new values on the service label for this purpose.
3-253
7. PASCAL (auto gradation correction control)
1 11 1
1] )) 1
<M>
PASCAL
<s>
112
<R> M-DMAX M-VRATE
 C-DMAX C-/RATE
<F> K-DMAX K-/RATE -
m m y ADJUST
Y - D M A X Y-VRATE
h&e m
l5mnhmddm 1 1 1 1
1 )) 1
<M>
PASCAL
437 2/2
47

<F7
ADJUST
Item PASCAL
Description Determines whether to use or not data on gradation correction and contrast potential obtained by auto gradation correction control. Indicates in % the result of comparing the solid black density read when auto gradation correction is executed against the design value. Indicates the control value (obtained from M/Y/KDMAX) used to determine contrast potential.
Settings Set it to 0 when adjusting images; otherwise, be sure to set it to 1. Standard: 1 Optimum value: 75 or higher
M/C/Y/K-DMAX
M/C/Y/KVRATE
3-254
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTEO IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU
JAPON)
Item DMXCTY/M/C/K
Description Use it to specify whether to use the solid density control data for each color obtained (auto gradation correction control). 0:Do not use. 1 :Use. Use it to specify whether to use the gradation correction control data of each color (auto gradation correction control). 0:Do not use. 1 :Use.
Settings Standard value: 1
LUTCT-Y/M/C/K
Standard value: 1
P-OFST Y/M/C/K
3-255
8. ADJ-MISC
CM>
mm
ADJUST
ADJ-MISC 4%

my
lmdi
X m
Item VCONT
Description Switches between auto and manual for target contrast potential (VG, VDC). 0: Auto (set by auto gradation correction control) 1-8: Manual 1 Y Vcount 1 M Vcount 1
Remarks l-8 are used for checks; normally, set it to 0 after a check. 9-2 are not used. (for factory)
6 7 8
310.00 295.00 245.00
295.00 275.00 225.00
315.00 290.00 225.00
380.00 370.00 330.00
SEG-ADJ
(Note 1) BC-ADJ (Note 1)
Fine-adjusts the separation level between text and photo in text/photo mode or text/halide mode. +: Identifies photos better. -: Identifies text better. This mode corrects text/photo setting of user mode. Use it to correct the black text correction/ACS level. A higher setting makes black text darker in 4-color text photo mode. For ACS evaluation, black will be identified more readily. Use it to correct the target value of the SALT signal. If fogging is noted only for Bk, increase the setting to suppress.
-3-+3 Standard: 0
-3-+3 Standard: 0
K-DOFST (Note 1)
Note 1:
-4 to +4 Standard: 0
The value will return to the standard value when the RAM is initialized, requiring re-input. Be sure to record any new value on the service label.
3-256
COPYRIUHT 8 1997 CANON INC.
9. FEED-ADJ (image position adjustment)

<M>
mm
ADJUST FEED-ADJ <s> <R> READY <f> READY
<F>
m
d 4
Item UP-ADJ
Description Adjusts the image write start position in main scanning direction when pick-up is from the upper cassette. Adjusts the image write start position in main scanning direction when pick-up is from the lower cassette. Adjusts the image write position in main scanning direction when pick-up is from the multifeeder. Adjusts the image write start position in main scanning direction when pick-up is from the paper deck. Adjusts the image write start position in main scanning direction for re-pick up operation. Adjusts the image write start position in sub scanning direction.
Remarks A higher value leads to a movement to the rear.
LOW-ADJ
MULT-ADJ DECK-ADJ (only if deck is connected) REFE-ADJ VSYC-ADJ
&
Front
Unit: 0.11 mm Standard: 128 Settings: 0 to 255
A higher value leads to a movement to the trailing edge.
Unit: 0.11 mm Standard: 128 Settings: 0 to 255
3-257
Item MARGN-L MARGN-R MARGN-T MARGN-B
Description Adjusts the non-image width along the front of the images. Adjusts the non-image width along the rear of the images. Adjusts the non-image width along the leading edge of the images.
Remarks A higher value increases the non-image width.

R
IREG-LP
Adjusts the non-image width along the trailing edge of the images.
L Unit: 0.062 mm Standard: L=32 R=32 T=40 B=40 Settings: 0 to 255
Use it to adjust the degree of arching copy paper at the rear of the registration roller (copy paper stop timing). 9 A higher setting will increase the arching. Too low a setting can cause skew movement.
Unit: 0 Standard value: 0 Settings: 6 to +6
3-258
10. ENV-SET (setting operation conditions for the cassette heater)
<M>
ENV-SET
<s> 26 C 40 % 1 016 g
 R E A D Y
<I=> U S E R
mm
ADJUST
BODY BODY BODY
og
>
29og 580g 105og 1mg 16OOg , 2160g
t0 t0 t0 t0
to to to
105og 15oog 16OOg 2160g
29% O F F =k O F F
OFF OFF ON ON ON
Item BODY C BODY % BODY g > ENV-A-G
Description Indicates the machine internal temperature measured by the environment sensor. Indicates the machine internal humidity measured by the environment sensor. Indicates the machine internal humidity absolute value (g) measured by the environment sensor. Indicates the present environment. Sets ON/OFF of the cassette heater.
Settings Same as the reading under DISPLAY + ANALOG.
The heater will turn on if the internal humidity absolute value exceeds the setting.
OFF
Sets to OFF for all environment.
The settings of ENV-SET are stored as soon as the CPU on the DC controller PCB is supplied with power (i.e., when the power plug is connected to the power outlet), and will be renewed every 8 hr.
COPYRIOHT (0 1997 CANON INC.
3-259
11. HV-TR (transfer high-voltage output adjustment by condition)

-. 2 .
<M> mm
ADJUST
HV-TR-Y
<s> II4
<R> R E A D Y
<f> R E A D Y
<F>
ii;;
BODY
xxx
xxx
C
x x x % g
ZONE A 0.09 t o 5.89 s e e 2/4 6.9g to18.0g s e e 3/4 ZONE B Z O N E C 18.Og to ---g s e e 414
Item B O D Y C BODY % BODY g TRY-OFSY/M/C/K
Description Indicates the machine internal temperature measured by the environment sensor. Indicates the machine internal humidity measured by the environment sensor. Indicates the machine internal humidity absolute value (g) measured by the environment sensor. Adjusts the transfer high-voltage output.
Remarks Same as the reading under DISPLAY + ANALOG.
Settings: -5 to +5 Unit: 1 .O uA Standard: 0
ZONE-A/B/C
Indicates the machine internal humidity absolute value (g) in the three ranges of A through C.
Note 1: The setting of this item will return to the default value when the PCB is replaced or the RAM is cleared, requiring input once again. Be sure to record any new setting you have made on the service label.
3-260
CANON CLCIOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME
AU JAPON)
I
ADJUST
CM> W-T&Y
<s> 2l4
<R>

<F>
BODY
xxx
m awe; d
mmm d d
<<<<<<< ZONE A >>>>>>> m m m
dddd XxXx XxXx XxXx

XXXX
Description
Remarks Same as the reading under DISPLAY +
B O D Y C
ed copy or on the 1st side of a
or on the 1st side of a two-sided Settings: -5 to +5
or on the 1st side
or on the 1st side
The setting of this item will return to the default value when the PCB is replaced or the RAM Is cleared, requiring input once again. Be sure to record any new setting you have made on the service label. Rafarcsnce: This mode will prove effective when correcting transfer faults under each item In queStiOn.
COPYRIGHT 0 1997 CANON INC. CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-261
12. HV-SP (separation high-voltage output fine-adjustment by condition)

<M> t-iv-SP
<s> l/4 &> R E A D Y R E A D Y
<F>
mm
ADJUST
B O D Y BODY BODY
xxx G xxx %
xxx
ZONE A 0.09 t o 5.ag s e e 2/4 ZONE 0 6.9g t o 16.Og s e e 3 4 Z O N E C 18.Og to ----g s e e 414
Item B O D Y C
Remarks Same as the reading under DISPLAY +

ANALOG.
BODY %
BODY g SP-OFST
Settings: -5 to +5 Unit: 25 pA Standard: 0
ZONE-A/B/C
I
I
Note 1:
The setting of this item will return to the default value when the PCB is replaced or the RAM is cleared, requiring input once again. Be sure to record any new setting you have made on the service label.
3-262
CANON CLClQQQ REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3. OPERATIONS AND TTMING
CM> Hv-SP
<s>
2i4
CR>

<F>
=.5:
0
mm
m rcljnn d
ADJUST
BODY
x=B
<<<<c<< ZONE A >>>>>>> m m m
ldiiii fdiiii
miiiii d,
XxXx
XxXx
XxXx
Item BODY C BODY % BODY g <<<ZONE-A>>> SP-Nl SP-N2 SP-OHP SP-# SP-Tl SP-T2 SP-UT1 SP-UT2 SP-Sl-1 SP-Sl -2 SP-sz-1 SP-s2-2 SP-s3-1 SP-S3-2
Description Indicates the machine internal temperature-measured

, by the environment sensor.
Indicates the machine internal humidity measured by the environment sensor. Indicates the machine internal humidity absolute value (g) measured by the environment sensor. indicates the zone in which the setting shown is effective.
Effective in plain paper mode and, in addition, when copying on a one-sided copy or on the 1st side of a
Effective in thick paper mode and, in addition, copyin on a one-sided copy or on the 1st side of a two-sidecp copy. Effective in thick paper mode and, in addition, copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy. Effective in ultra thick paper mode and, in addition, when copying on the 1st side of a two-sided copy. Effective in ultra thick paper mode and, in addition, when copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy. Effective in special paper 1 mode and, in addition, when copying on a one-sided copy or on the 1st side of a two-sided copy. Effective in special paper 1 mode and, in addition, when copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy. Effective in special paper 2 mode and, in addition, when copying on a one-sided copy. Effective in special paper 2 mode and, in addition, when copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy. Effective in special paper 3 mode and, in addition, when copying on a one-sided copy or on the 1st side of a two-sided copy. In special paper 3 mode and, in addition, when copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy.
Settings: -5 to +5 Unit: 25 uA Standard: 0
The setting of this item will return to the default value when the PCB is replaced or the RAM . . is .cleared, requiring input once again. Be sure to record any new setting you have made on the service IaDel.
COPYRlOtlT Q ION7 CANON INC.
CANON CLCiOW REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3463
<M>
HV-FS
4% 2M
-a>

<F>
ADJUST <<<<<<< ZONE A >>>>>>> miiii diii
FS-Sl-1 FS-Sl -2 FS-S2-1 FS-S2-2 FS-S3-1 FS-S3-2
Effective in special paper 1 mode and, in addition, when copying on a one-sided copy or on the 1st side of a two-srded copy. Effective in special paper 1 mode and, in addition, when copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy. Effective in special paper 2 mode and, in addition, when copying on a one-sided copy. Effective in special paper 2 mode and, in addition, when copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy. Effective in special paper 3 mode and, in addition, when copying on a one-sided copy or on the 1st side of a two-sided copy. In special paper 3 mode and, in addition, when copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy.
The setting of this item will return to the default value when the PCB is replaced or the RAM is cleared, requiring input once again. Be sure to record any new setting you have made on the service label.
lwerencelt This moda will prove efftxtlve when k&ctlng image dlstortion under each Item In question.
COPYRIOHT Q 1997 CANON INC. CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-265
- 3. OPERATIONS AND TlMlNG
14. HV-EL (fine-adjustment for internal static eliminator high-voltage outnut . according to conditions)
CM> m m
ADJUST B O D Y BODY BODY m xXxX HV-EL <s> l/4 x x x Oc xXx% m g <R> READY

READY
<F>
ZONE A 0.Q to 5.8g s e e a4 ZONE B 6.9g to 18.Og s e e 3/4 Z O N E C 18.Og to -----g see 414
Item B O D Y C BODY % BODY g EL-OFST
Remarks Same as the reading under DISPLAY + - ANALOG.
Settings: -5 to +1 Unit: 0.5 kV Standard: 0
ZONE A/B/C
Note 1: The setting of this item will return to the default value when the PCB is replaced or the RAM is cleared, requiring input once again. Be sure to record any new setting you have made on the service label.
3-266
COPYfUQHT Q 1997 CANON INC.
<M>
HV-EL
<s> 2l4
<lb

<F>
Item B O D Y C BODY % BODY g <<<ZONE-A>>> EL-N1 EL-N2 EL-OHP EL-# EL-T1 EL-T2 EL-UT1 EL-UT2 EL-S1 -1 EL-S1 -2 EL-S2-1 EL-S2-2 EL-S3-1 EL-S3-2
L
Description Indicates the machine internal temperature measured by the environment sensor. Indicates the machine internal humidity measured by the environment sensor. Indicates the machine internal humidity absolute value (g) measured by the environment sensor. Indicates the zone in which the setting shown is effective. Effective in plain paper mode and, in addition, when copying on a one-sided copy or on the 1st side of a two-sided copy. Effective in plain paper mode and, in addition, when copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy. Effective in OHP mode. Effective during image position correction control. Effective in thick paper mode and, in addition, copyin on a one-sided copy or on the 1 st side of a two-side 8 CODV. Effective in thick paper mode and, in addition, copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy. Effective in ultra thick paper mode and, in addition, when copying on the i stside of a two-sided copy. Effective in ultra thick paper mode and, in addition, when copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy. Effective in special paper 1 mode and, in addition, when copying on a one-sided copy or on the 1st side of a two-sided copy. Effective in special paper 1 mode and, in addition, when copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy. Effective in special paper 2 mode and, in addition, when copying on a one-sided copy. Effective in special paper 2 mode and, in addition, when copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy. Effective in special paper 3 mode and, in addition, when copying on a one-sided copy or on the 1st side of a two-sided copy. In special paper 3 mode and, in addition, when copying on the 2nd side of a two-sided copy.
Settings: -5 to +l Unit: 0.5 kV Standard: 0
1
1
1
I
The setting of this item will return to the default value when the PCB is replaced or tne H A M I8 clearea, requiring input once again. Be sure to record any new setting you have made on the service label.
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY lBB7 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPAIME AU JAPON)
3-267
D. FUNCTION (function/inspection)
1 2 3 4
5
INSTALL R-CON DC-CON CCD PRJ-ADJ LASER P-UP-TMG ATTRACT
INSTALL for installation Reader controller PCB-related adjustment DC controller PCB-related adjustment
I CCD-related adjustment
Projector-related adjustment Laser adjustment Pick-up timing adjustment Retention point adjustment
I Photosensitive drum potential measurement
6 7 8
9
EPC BLADE FUSER CST-AD F-MISCs
10 11 12 13
Transfer blade/transfer belt cleaning blade operation Fixing assembly-related adjustment Cassette paper width adjustment Reader-related operation/inspection
1 4 1 F-MISCp 15 16 TCLN P-THICK
1 Printer-related operation/inspection
Polishing roller/oil removing roller operation Paper sensor adjustment
17 1 IMG-REG
Image position correction control operation/inspection
3-268
1. INSTALL (at time of installation)
JJ 44 111 bbJj
m FUNC m
<M> INSTALL
<s>
2l4 B O
<R> D Y

5059
<F>
m m m 7
d
Item
INKY/M/C
Description Use it to read in the initial value of the toner density signal (SGNL, REF) of the specified color. l The value will be indicated on screen 3/4. Record it to the service label. Reads the initial value of the toner density signal (SGNL, REF) of three colors (Y, M, C) in sequence. l The value will be indicated on screen 3/4. Record it to the service label. Reads the initial value of the toner density signal (SGNL, REF) of the ATR and SALT sensors in sequence. l The value will be indicated on screens 3/4 and 414. Record it to the service label. Reads the initial value of the SALT signal (SGNL, REF) of the specified color. l The value will be indicated on screen 414. Record it to the service label. Reads the initial value of the SALT slgnal (SGNL, REF) of four colors (M, C, Y, K) in sequence. l The value will be indicated on screen 4/4. Record it to the service label.
Remarks
INK-3
INIT-
SINIT-Y/M/C/K
SINIT-
COPYRI(IHT 0 1887 CANON INC.
3-269
Item STIR-Y/M/C/K STIR-4 SPLY-Y/M/C/K SPLY-4
Description Stirs the developer of the specified color. Stirs the developers of the four colors. Rotates the cylinder of the developing assembly to supply developer of the specified color. Rotates the cylinders of the developing assemblies for four colors to supply developers of the four colors at the same time. Turns on or off the image position auto correction function. 0: OFF 1: ON Turns on or off the toner sensor output mode for moving up/down the hopper. 0: OFF l:ON Use it to suppress fogging of Bk, if noted in a lowhumidity environment, as follows: 1 .In the environment in question, check to make sure that the moisture content is 5 g (indicated as 500 g on the screen) or less. 2.Replace the Bk developer. (See the descriptions on p. O-00; however, do not execute auto gradation correction as yet.) 3.Execute FUNC+INSTALL (2nd page)+NLSE%K in service mode. (about 1 min) 4.Check to make sure that PASCAL in ADJUST+PASCAL in service mode is 1. 5.Execute auto gradation correction in user mode. Executes auto correction of the read-in coordinates of the image position correction pattern. Rotates the cylinder of the developing assembly to draw developer out of the developing assembly of the specified color. l Be sure to place the developer collecting container under the developer before opening of the developer supply mouth.
Remarks
IMG-REG
LSNS-KIL
Initial: 0 Used only at time of installation.
NLSETK
REG-APER RECV-Y/M/C/K
RECV-4
Rotates the cylinders of the developing assemblies to draw the developers out of the developing assemblies for four colors. Use it to read in the initial value of the window soiling correction coefficient of a specific color. Use it to read in the initial value of the window soiling correction coefficient of the four colors.
WINCLRY/M/C/K WINCLR-4
3-270
CANON CLCl MM REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
<M>
INSTALL
<s> 3 1 4 SGNL-M
<R> SGNL-C

<F>
m m SGNL-Y
xxx m FUNC m REF-Y xxx SIGG-Y xxx
xxx REF-M xxx SIGG-M xxx SIGG-C FIEF-C
xxx xxx xxx
Item SG NL-Y/M/C
Description Indicates the value of the toner density signal when INIT is executed as ATR control. Be sure to record the reading on the label (Figure 3702). Indicates the value of the toner density reference signal when INIT is executed as ATR control. Be sure to record the reading on the label (Figure 3702). Indicates the gain value (gain value used to set SGNL-M/SGNL-C/SGNL-Y to 818) for the toner density signal during ATR control. Be sure to record the reading on the label (Figure 3702).
Remarks For SGNL-M, SGNL-C, and SGNL-Y, normally, 818 *41.
REF-Y/M/C
SIGG-YAK
CANON CLCiOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-271
<M> INSTALL
<s>
44
CR> SGNL-S-C xxx REF-S-C xxx SGNL-D-C xxx SIGG-S-C xxx

SGNL-S-K xxx REF-S-K xxx SGNL-D-K xxx SIGG-S-K xxx
<F>
m m SGNL-S-Y
xxx m FUNC m FIEF-S-Y xxx SGNL-D-Y xxx SIGG-S-Y xxx
SGNL-S-M xxx REF-S-M SGNL-D-7 xxx SIGG-S-M xxx
Item SGNL-SY/M/C/K REF-S-Y/M/C/K SGNL-DY/M/C/K SIGG-SY/M/C/K
Description
1
Remarks
Indicates the value of the SALT signal. Be sure to record the reading on the label (Figure 31102). Indicates the value of the SALT reference signal. Be sure to record the reading (Figure 3-l 102). Indicates the value of the light reflected by the photosensitive drum. Be sure to record the reading (Figure 3-1102). Indicates the value of the gain for the SALT signal. Be sure to record the reading (Figure 3-l 102).
3-272
COPYRlGHTO1997CANONINC.
CANONCLClOOOREV.1MAY1997 PRlNTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
3. OPERATIONS ANDTIMING -
2. R-CON (reader controller PCB-related adjustment)

<Ms R-CON mm m
WON-1 XxXx RCON-6 <s> l/2 <t+- READY

<F>
m
RCONQ XxXx RCON-3 XxXx WON-4 XxXx RCON-5 XxXx
n;mm
FUNC
Item RAM-CLR
Description Clears the RAM on the reader controller PCB and sets the standard value.
Remarks The main switch will automatically turn off when RAM-CLR is executed. The contents of the RAM are replaced with the initial settings when the main switch is turned on thereafter. During operation, <R>READY->BUSY. Indicates only when CHK-SUM is executed.
CHK-SUM WON-1 WON-2 WON-3 RCON4 RCON-5 RCONB
Starts a check of the ROM on the reader controller PCB, i.e., totals the RAM data. Indicates the check sum value of Q1301 on the reader controller PCB. Indicates the check sum value of Q1305 on the reader controller PCB. Indicates the check sum value of Q1308 on the reader controller PCB. Indicates the check sum value of Q1312 on the reader controller PCB. Indicates the check sum value of Q1315 on the reader controller PCB. Reserved.
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY lM7 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-273
3. DC-CON (DC controller PCB-related adjustment)
1 44 b)1 1
mm F U N C
<M>
DC-CON
db 115 <fb
READY

<F> mmm
mm DCCON-1 XxXx DCCON-2 XxXx
Item RAM-CLR
Description Clears the RAM on the DC controller PC6 and sets the standard value.
Remarks The contents of the RAM will not be replaced with the initial settings until the CPU on the DC controller PCB is powered, requiring you to turn off the main switch and disconnect and then connect the power plug after executing RAM-CLR.
CHK-SUM DCCON-1 DCCONP
Starts a check of the ROM on the DC controller PCB, i.e., totals the data in RAM. Indicates the check sum value of Q2341 on the DC controller PCB. Indicates the check sum value of Q2340 on the DC controller PCB. Indicates only when CHK-SUM is executed.
3-274
COPYRIQHT (D 1997 CANON INC.
CANON CLClWO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPAIME AU JAPON)
1 14 1
Ij )) [
<M>
DC-CON
<S>
2/5
CR> READY

<F>
n Entering Backup Data If you have executed RAM-CLR for the DC controller PCB, use this screen to enter the data recorded, on the label shown in Figure 3-l 102. Item U P-A4R UP-STMR LOW-A4R LOW-STMR M F-A4R MF-A6R MF-A4 Description Enters the adjustment value for paper width detection reference point 1 for cassette 1. Enters the adjustment value for paper width detection reference point 2 for cassette 1. Enters the adjustment value for paper width detection reference point 1 for cassette 2. Enters the adjustment value for paper width detection reference point 2 for cassette 2. Enters the adjustment value for paper width detection reference point 1 for the multifeeder. Enters the adjustment value for paper width detection reference point 2 for the multifeeder. Enters the adjustment value for paper width detection reference point 3 for the multifeeder. Remarks
COPYRIGHT8 1997 CANONINC.
CANONCLClOOOREV.1MAY1997 PRlNTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAU
JAPON)
3-275
N Entering Backup Data If you have executed RAM-CLR for the DC controller PCB, use this screen to enter the data recorded on the label shown in Figure 3-1102. Item SGNL-Y/M/C Description Enters the value of the toner density signal when INIT is executed as ATR control. Enters the value of the toner density reference signal when INIT is executed as ATR control. Enters the value of the gain for the toner density signal during ATR control (gain used to set GNL-M, SGNL-C, and SGNL-Y to 818). Remarks
REF-Y/M/C
SIGGY/M/C
3-276
COPYAIOHT 8 1997 CANON INC.
CANON CLClDOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
<M> DC-CON
mm m
FUNC m
4% 445
<f+ READY
 m e
<F>
m d
@mm d
m d
tiddd dddd * d d* -
Backup Data If you have executed RAM-CLR for the DC controller PCB, use this screen to enter the data recorded on the label shown in Figure 3-l 102. Item SGNL-SY/M/C/K REF-S-Y/M/C/K SGNL-DY/M/C/K SIGG-SY/M/C/K PT-OFST-K PUDT-U/L Description Use it to enter the value of the SALT signal. Use it to enter the value of the SALT reference signal. Use it to enter the value of the signal representing the intensity of light reflected by the photosensitive drum. Use it to enter the value of the gain for the SALT signal. Use it to enter the adjustment value of the density pattern for SALT. Use it to enter the adjustment value for pick-up timing adjustment (P-UP-TMG). Remarks
I Entering
COPYRlOHTQ1997
CANON INC.
CANONCLClOOOREV.1MAY1997 PRlNTEOINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
3-277
CR> READY

<F>
FUNC
n Entering Backup Data If you have executed RAM-CLR for the DC controller PCB, use this screen to enter the data recorded on the label shown in Figure 3-1102. I P-TH-l/2 SNSR-RNK t e m Description Enters the output characteristics of the paper thickness sensor set at time of shipment from the factory, Enters the characteristics of the paper thickness sensor to be installed newly. Use it to enter the offset value for the image position correction pattern. Use it to enter the offset value for the potential sensor. The values A through E change by toggle operation. Do not enter any values other than those on the service data sheet. Remarks
Y/C/K-OFST
POTOFSTYY/M /C/K
3-270
COPYRlOHT@ 10il7CANONINC.
CANONCLClOOO REV.1 MAY1997 PRINTEOINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
4. CCD (CCD-related adjustment) lu 4% 1 ))

1 <M>
CCD l/2 <R> READY

cF>
mm m
FUNC m
m
LAMP XxXx
I mxx CCD-OFST OFFST BLUE XxXx BLUE XxXx
GREEN XxXx GREEN XxXx GREEN XxXx
RED XxXx RED XxXx RED XxXx
Item AUTO-ADJ
Description Use it to specify the start of auto adjustment.The bar code data recorded on the standard white plate is read, and offset adjustment, intensity adjustment for the scanning lamp, and gain adjustment are executed in sequence. The display changes as follows: &BRADY + Bar code -+ OeAdj + Offdj + LampAdj + GainAdj + OeAdj + InitBAdj + Gz-bar. Use it to indicate the level adjustment value of the scanning lamp. Use it to display the shading adjustment correction value (target value of point B). Use it to indicate the data of BLUE. Use it to indicate the data of GREEN. Use it to indicate the data of RED. Use it to indicate the setting of the gain-up mode (precious metal mode) for the analog processor PCB.
Remarks Adjustments are made so that the value of point A is identical to the setting obtained from the bar code data recorded on the standard white plate.
LAMP TARGET BLUE GREEN RED GAIN-UP
0: normal mode 255: precious metal mode
CANON ClClOOO REV.1 MAY 1897 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-279
Item OFFST
Description Indicates the value for offset level adjustment of the odd bits of the CCD. Indicates the data for blue of the offset level.
Remarks
I BLUE I
I I II
( GREEN 1 Indicates the data for green of the offset level.
I RED
I
II Indicates the data for red of the offset level.
BALANCE BLUE
Indicates the value for balance level adjustment of the even and odd bits of the CCD.
I Indicates the data for blue of the balance level.
I
I II
I
GREEN 1 Indicates the data for green of the balance level.

I
RED GAIN BLUE GREEN RED
1 Indicates the data for red of the balance level. I
Indicates the value for gain level adjustment of the CCD. Indicates the data for blue of the gain level, Indicates the data for green of the gain level. Indicates the data for red of the gain level.
Scaning lamp
9 LAMP
OFST BALANCE GAIN GAIN-UP
Point A
B (TARGET)
Figure 3-1105
3-280
COPYRHIHT 8 1997 CAWOH INC.
i. PRJ-ADJ (projector adjustment)

<M> PRJ-ADJ 4% CR> R E A D Y

<F>
Item PRJ-LAMP PRJ-CCD NEGA-6 NEGA-G NEGA-R (Notel)
Description Keeps the lamp of the film projector ON for 1 min. (A press on the PRJ-LAMP key turns it off.) Adjusts the gain for the CCD and reads the appropriate data for installation work. Adjusts the target value for shading when making copies of negative film using the film projector. A higher value will make the images darker. B+Y G+M R-C Adjusts the target value for shading correction when making copies of positive film using the film projector. A lower value will make the images darker. B+Y G+M R+C
l
Settings
-1 oo-+lOO
POSI-B POSI-G POSI-R (Notel)
-1 oo-+lOO
Note 1 You must enter the appropriate value whenever you have replaced the reader controller PCB or initialized a RAM; record any new values on the service label for this purpose.
3481
6. LASER (laser adjustment)

Screen for Y [I 11 1 0 )) 1 <M> LASER-Y <S> 1/4 CR> READY <F>
FUNC
Screen for M/C (screen for M is shown) J 44 [ (I bb 1 <M> LASER-M <S> 214 m m <R> m <F>
mm m FUNC
Screenfor Sk
Item 1RPOWER POWER BIAS+, M, C, K) 400-POO-(Y, M. C, K) 200-POO- Y, M, C, K 266-POO- Y, M, C, K 400-PFF-(Y, M, C, K) 200-PFF- Y, M, C, K 266-PFF- Y, M, C, K
Description Turns ON the laser output for laser power minimum value adjustment. Turns ON the laser output for laser power maximum value adjustment. Turns ON the laser output for laser power bias value adjustment. Turns ON the laser output corresponding to VOO to check VOO in text mode. Turns ON the laser output corresponding to VOO to check VOO in photo mode. Turns ON the laser output corresponding to VOO to check VFF in text mode. Turns ON the laser output corresponding to VOO to check VFF in photo mode.
Remarks A press on the Stop key will turn off the laser output.
3-282
COPYRIGHT Cp 1987 CANON INC.
CANON CLClOOO AEV.l MAY 1997 PRINTEO IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7. P-UP-TMG (pick-up timing adjustment)

<M> 
o 7
P-UP-TMG 4% D A T A - U o
CR> P U D T - U PUDT-L PUDT-D
<F>
m m 7 m FUNC m
Item PK-ADJ-U/L
Description Use it to execute automatic pick-up from the upper/lower cassette, thereby obtaining the pick-up timing adjustment value. Be sure to place A4 or LTR paper in the upper and lower cassettes before executing the operation. Use it to indicate the data obtained by PK-ADJ-U/LID. Use it to indicate the maximum value of the data obtained by PK-AJD-U/LID. Use it to write the obtained data into memory. Use it to execute skew removing operation twice when pick-up is from the multifeeder tray (effective only when the paper type is set to thickest). 0: Remove skew by registration roller 1: Remove skew by registration roller and feeding roller Use it to start automatic pick-up from the paper deck and to obtain the pick-up timing adjustment value. To execute the mode, you must place LTR paper in the paper deck.
Settings
DATA-U/L/D PUDT-U/L/D D-SEND-U/L/D MF-SKEW
Use it if thick paper tends to move askew.
PK-ADJ-D
Use the mode if a discrepancy Is noted along the leading edges of LTR copies.
For how to use the modes, see the instructions given under After Replacing the Pick-Up MotorPIckUp Unit under J-g.
3-283
- 3. OPERATIONS AND lIMlNG
8. AlTRACT (retention position adjustment)

<M>
<R>
AlTRACT
<s>

<F>
Item ATT-SLCT
Description Selects the source of paper for checking the point of retention. Source of paper 1 2 3 4 5 Upper cassette Lower cassette Paper deck Multifeeder Duplexing pick-up assembly
Remarks Use A4kTR paper for the mode.
A-IT-ON
Starts operations according to the settings under ATT-SLCT, and stops automatically with copy paper retained on the transfer belt.
3-284
COPYRIGHT 0 lM7 CANON INC.
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1697 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAfUN)
9. EPC (photosensitive drum potential measurement)

<M> EPC
<s> II2 <R>
cP>
<F>
m
FUNC m
v
voo-3oov-Y xx voo-7oov-Y xx VFF9OOV-Y xx VFF-7OOV-Y xx VOO-3ooV-M xx VOO-7OOV-M xx VFF-3OOV-M xx VFF-7OOV-M xx voo-3oov-c xx voo-7oov-C xx VFF-SOOV-C xx VFFdOOV-C xx VOO-3OOV-K xx VOO-7OOV-K xx VFF9OOWK xx VFF-7OOV-K xx
mm
m
FUNC m
EPC-Y xx% POTOFSTY 4 xx
EPC-M xxx POTOFSTM & xx
EPC-C xxx POTOFSTC 6 xx
EPC-K xxx POTOFSTK & xx
Item EPC
Description Executes potential measurement on the photosensitive drum. Indicates the offset value for the potential sensor. Executes offset adjustment on the potential measurement circuit of the photosensitive drum. Indicates the photosensitive drum surface potential when the grid bias potential of the primary charging assembly is -300 V and the laser output is VOO. Indicates the photosensitive drum surface potential when the grid bias potential of the primary charging assembly is -700 V and the laser output is VOO. Indicates the photosensitive drum surface potential when the grid bias potential of the primary charging assembly is -300 V and the laser output is VFF. Indicates the photosensitive drum surface potential when the grid bias potential of the primary charging assembly is -700 V and the laser output is VFF.
Remarks The potential measurement data is used for the next copying run.
POTOFSTY/M/C/K OFFSET
The potential measurement data is used for the next copying run. Approximate value: 250-350
voo-3oov
voo-7oov
Approximate value: 650-750
VFF-300V
VFF-700V
CANON CLMOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-285
10. BLADE (transfer blade/transfer belt cleaning blade operation)

<M>
<s>
CR>

<F>
Item. BLD-SLCT
Description Use it to determine the combination of ways to operate the transfer blade and the transfer belt cleaning blade. l Press BLD-SLCT, enter a number on the keypad, and press the m key. Transfer blade 1 2 3 In contact Off contact In contact Transfer cleaning blade Off contact In contact In contact
Remarks
BLD-ON
Starts operation according to the settings under BLD-SLCT. In 10 set, the blade will take offcontact position.
3-286
CANON CLClOIM REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11. FUSER (fixing assembly-related adjustment)

<M> FUSER
<s> <R> READY

<F>
Item NIP-CHK
Description Measures the fixing assembly nip. Copy paper is stopped once at the point of fixing and then delivered. Sine the operation uses cassette 1 as the source of paper, NO PAPER will be indicated over P if no paper exists in cassette 1. The notation changes to READY when paper is supplied. Clears EOOO. Be sure to turn off and then on the power switch after execution. Clears E005. Be sure to turn off and then on the power switch after execution. Use it to adjust the fixing temperature value (upper roller). If you have replaced the fixing assembly, enter the value recorded on the label attached to the fixing assembly. Thereafter, be sure to turn off and then on the power switch. Use it to adjust the fixing temperature value (lower roller). If you have replaced the fixing assembly, enter the value recorded on the label attached to the fixing assembly. Thereafter, be sure to turn off and then on the power switch.
Remarks Press NIP-CHK to execute. The notation over P changes from READY to SERVICE and then to READY to end the execution. The notation over P changes from ERROR to BUSY and then to ERROR. Turn off and on the power switch to clear. At time of shipment:0 Settings: -3 to +3
EOOO-RLS
E005-RLS
UPPER-CR
LOWER-CR
3-207
12. CST-AD (cassette paper width adjustment)
I mm
<M>
CST-AD
<s>

<F>
m
d
m
d <---------rnx
m
FUNC m
d wwx
d XxXx
<--e--XxXx <_-
xX0( XxXx
See 5. Registering Basic Settings under B. Electrical in II. Standards and Adjustments. Item UP-A4R UP-STMR LOW-A4R LOW-STMR MF-A4R MF-A6R MF-A4 Description Executes automatic adjustment of paper width detection reference point 1 for cassette 1. Executes automatic adjustment of paper width detection reference point 2 for cassette 1. Executes automatic adjustment of paper width detection reference point 1 for cassette 2. Executes automatic adjustment of paper width detection reference point 2 for cassette 2. Executes automatic adjustment of paper width detection reference point 1 for the multifeeder. Executes automatic adjustment of paper width detection reference point 2 for the multifeeder. Executes automatic adjustment of paper width detection reference point 3 for the multifeeder. Remarks
,
3-288
3. OPERATIONS AND TIMING D
13. F-MISCs (reader-related operation/inspection)

<M>
F-MISCs 4% <R> READY

<F>
Item LED-CHK LED-OFF LCD-CHK KEY-CHK
Description Starts an activation check on the LED. Starts an activation check on the LED. Starts an activation check on the LCD. (The notation becomes highlighted.) Starts an input check on the key. (See the detail for KEY-CHK.) Ends the input check on the key. Starts a check on the scanner. Each press on SC-MOVED changes the notation and the operation as follows: Notation Operation o/4 HP+A A+B l/4 B+C 2l4 314 C+HP m
Remarks
A press on the Stop key ends the check. Indicates the number/name of the input key in question.
KEY-OFF SC-MOVE
HP rA
I/ 40/
SC-MOVE
FILT-IMG
Starts an output check on each CCD (RGB). When the Copy Start key is pressed with a color original on the copyboard glass, the CCD output for R, G, and B will be copied on separate sheets in cyan-mono. The operation will stop automatically after generating the copies. Starts a check on the scanning lamp. Each press on LAMP-ON changes the notation and the operation as follows: Notation O+l l-+0 Operation ON when intensity data 80 (light) ON when Intensity data 00 (dark) Each press on the key switches between 00 ~1t,80 for the Intensity
l
LAMP-ON
d~d
represents OFF
DEMO RESERVE1/2/3/4
Reserved. Reserved.
3-289
n Details of KEY-CHK
Key
0 to 9 Reset stop Two-Sided One-Touch Adjust Color Adjust Extended Zoom Frame Erase Color Create Page Separate Shift Image Create Freehand Area Select Synthesize User Mode Cover Transparency Insert Start Pre-Heat Interrupt Clear ID Call o-9 RESET STOP A B C D E F G H
I
Key name
J K L M N 0 START STAND BY INTERRUPT CLEAR ID CALL
3-290
14. F-MISCp (printer-related operation/inspection)

 <F>
II
11 bb 1
<M>
F-MISCp
<s>
II2
CR> READY
lpBii#immI~1 ~5wm~IIlimm~
FUNC
<M> F-MISCp
<s>
2l2
CR> -

<F>
mm n;rmm
FUNC m
mm-
Item IO IO-ON SHV
Description Use it to select the type of IO (input/output) check. Use it to start an IO (input/output) check. Use it to select the type of check on the highvoltage output. Enter a number on the keypad, and press the OK key. Use it to start a check on the high-voltage output. Press the Stop key to stop operation. Use it to select the type of check on the motor. Enter a number on the keypad, and press the OK key. Use it to start a check on the motor. Press the Stop key to stop the operation. Use it to select the type of check on the fan. Enter a number on the keypad, and press the OK key. Use it to start a check on the fan. Press the Stop key to stop the operation. Use it to cause the drum to rotate idly for 10 min. Press the Stop key to stop.
Remarks See the details section.
0 to 6 See the details section.
SHV-ON
MTR
M FIT-ON FAN
FAN-ON DRM-ROT
Be sure to release the transfer belt before execution.
COPYAlQHTQ1~97 CANONINC.
CANONCLClOOO REV.1 MAY1997 PRINTEOINJAPAN (IMPRIME AUJAPON)
3-291
Item BUFF
Description Use it to select the stop position (length of advance) for the locking cam inside the buffer path. 1: Omm 2: 0.7 mm 3: 1.2 mm Enter a number on the keypad, and press the OK key. Use it to drive the buffer path motor and the solenoid, thereby moving the cam to the position selected under BUFF. Be sure to set BUFF=i and execute BUFFON after the check. Use it to clear E075. After execution, check to make sure that the transfer belt is at the correct position; then, turn off and then on the power switch. Use it to check the operation of the auto poweroff mechanism.
Remarks
I
BUFF-ON
E075/RLS
SHUT-OFF
3-292
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTEO IN JAPAN (IMPRIME
AU JAPON)
W Details of IO
No. 1 2 3 4 5
Parts name
Transfer cleaning blade solenoid (SL6)
No.
27
Parts name
Paper deck feeding clutch (CL8001)
II
Transfer belt lifter clutch (CL17) Polishing roller solenoid (SL18) Y transfer blade (SL7Y) M transfer blade (SL7M) C transfer blade (SL7C) K transfer blade (SL7Bk) Y toner supply clutch (CLl)
II
28 29 30 31 32
II
Paper deck pick-up clutch ((X8002) (CL) Duplexing assembly pick-up roller clutch (CLIP) Registration releasing solenoid (SLI 6) Registration roller clutch (CL8) Pick-up vertical path roller 1 clutch (CL1 1) Pick-up vertical path roller 2 clutch (CL13)
6
7 8 9 10
33
34
1 M toner supply clutch (CL2) C toner supply clutch (CL3) K upper toner supply clutch (CL4)
35
36 37
Pick-up vertical path roller 3 clutch (CL15) Stopper plate solenoid (SL12) Reversal drive (CL1 6)
11
12 13 14 15
I I
I K lower toner supply clutch (CL5)

Fixing web take up solenoid (SL3) Fixing web releasing solenoid (SL4) Fixing oil pump drive solenoid (Sl2)
38
39 40 41
I Delivery deflecting plate solenoid (SL14)

D_&xing unit paper deflecting plate solenoid (L; Duplexing unit paper deflecting plate solenoid (M; SLllM) ~.$e$-rg unit paper deflecting plate solenoid (S;
I
16 17
I I
1 Separation claw releasing solenoid (SL15) 1 SALT sensor shutter (SLl7Y, M, C, Bk)
1 42 1 I
Buffer
(SL)
1 43 1 B u f f e r f l a p p e r ( S L ) II I 18; 1 Cassette 1 pick-up roller releasing solenoid (SLQ) ( 44 1 Buffer de-curling clutch (CL) 19
Cassette 2 pick-up roller releasing solenoid
I (SLlO)
Multifeeder 2 pick-up roller releasing solenoid (SL5) Paper deck 2 pick-up roller releasing solenoid (SLSOOl) Duplexing unit pick-up roller releasing solenoid (SL8)
45 46 47 48
Pre-exposure lamp Fixing motor (188 mm/s) ATR LED SALT-Y LED
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 Feeding roller solenoid (SL13)

Cassette 1 pick-up clutch (CL1 2) Cassette 2 pick-up clutch (CL14)
1 49 1 SALT-M LED
56 51 SALT-C LED SALT-K LED
I Multifeeder pick-up clutch (CL6)

I
II
II
3-293
n Details of SHV No. 1 High-voltage output Primary Y charging assembly, grid Y output, auxiliary high-voltage Y (-350 ~JA), developing bias YDC (-370 V) output Control Transfer lifter DOWN, photosensitive drum motor ON, pre-exposure ON, primary Y output, grid Y output (500 V), auxiliary high-voltage output Y (-350 PA), developing bias YDC (-370 v) output IB (Waits for a stop command, or 60 sec.) Primary Y output, grid Y output (500 V), auxiliary high-voltage output Y (-350 PA), developing bias YDC (-370 V) output OFF, pre-exposure OFF, photosensitive drum motor OFF Transfer lifter DOWN, photosensitive drum motor ON, pre-exposure ON, primary M output, grid M output (500 V), auxiliary high-voltage output M (-350 PA), developing bias MDC (-370 V) output IB (Waits for a stop command, or 60 sec.) Primary M output, grid M output (500 V), auxiliary high-voltage output M (-350 uA), developing bias MDC (-370 V) output OFF, pre-exposure OFF, photosensitive drum motor OFF Transfer lifter DOWN, photosensitive drum motor ON, pre-exposure ON, primary C output, grid C output (500 V), auxiliary high-voltage output C (-350 uA), developing bias CDC (-370 V) output IB (Waits for a stop command, or 60 sec.) Primary C output, grid C output (500 V), auxiliary high-voltage output C (-350 PA), developing bias CDC (-370 V) output OFF, pre-exposure OFF, photosensitive drum motor OFF Transfer lifter DOWN, photosensitive drum motor ON, pre-exposure ON, primary K output, grid K output (500 V), auxiliary high-voltage output K (-350 uA), developing bias KDC (-370 V) output IB (Waits for a stop command, or 60 sec.) Primary K output, grid K output (500 V), auxiliary high-voltage output K (-350 uA), developing bias KDC (-370 V) output OFF, pre-exposure OFF, photosensitive drum motor OFF
Primary M charging assembly, grid M output, auxiliary high-voltage Y (-350 uA), developing bias MDC (-370 V) output
Primary C charging assembly, grid C output, auxiliary high-voltage Y (-350 FA), developing bias CDC (-370 V) output
4.
Primary K charging assembly, grid K output, auxiliary high-voltage Y (-350 PA), developing bias KDC (-370 V) output
3-294
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAfON)
No.
High-voltage output Primary Y/M/C/K primary charging assembly, Y/M/C/K grid output, Y/M/C/K transfer high-voltage, developing bias Y/M/C/K-DC (-370 V) output, internal static eliminator assembly, separation charging assembly output
Control Transfer lifter UP, photosensitive drum motor ON, pre-exposure ON, belt motor ON, transfer blade ON Y/M/C/K primary output, grid output (500 V), developing bias DC (-370 V) output, internal static eliminator assembly output, separation charging output, transfer charging output ON (Waits for a stop command while the transfer belt makes 10 rotations.) Transfer charging output, internal static eliminator assembly output, separation charging output OFF, transfer blade OFF, post rotation sequence Developing bias Y-AC/DC output, anti-stray toner high-voltage output ON (Waits for a stop command, or 60 sec.) Developing bias Y-AC/DC output, anti-stray toner high-voltage output OFF Developing bias M-AC/DC output, anti-stray toner high-voltage output ON (Waits for a stop command, or 60 sec.) Developing bias M-AC/DC output, anti-stray toner high-voltage output OFF Developing bias C-AC/DC output, anti-stray toner high-voltage output ON (Waits for a stop command, or 60 sec.) Developing bias C-AC/DC output, anti-stray toner high-voltage output OFF Developing bias K-AC/DC output, anti-stray toner high-voltage output ON (Waits for a stop command, or 60 sec.) Developing bias K-AC/DC output, anti-stray toner high-voltage output OFF
Developing bias Y-AC/DC output, anti-stray toner high-voltage output
Developing bias M-AC/DC output, antistray toner high-voltage output
Developing bias C-AC/DC output, anti-stray toner high-voltage output
Developing bias K-AC/DC output, anti-stray toner high-voltage output
COPYRIQHT (D 1097 CANON INC.
3-205
n Details of MTR No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Motor Ml0 (pick-up motor) (Note 1) M21 (photosensitive drum motor) (Note 1) M8 (laser scanner motor) (Note 1) M20 (waste toner feeding motor) (Note 1) MlSv, M18M, M18C, M18Bk (Y/M/C/K developing motor) (Note 1) M9 (fixing motor) ( N o t e 1 ) Control Operates for 10 set, stops for 3 set, and then operates for 10 set and stops. Operates for 10 set, stops for 3 set, and then operates for 10 set and stops. Operates for 10 set, stops for 3 set, and then operates for 10 set and stops. Operates for 10 set, stops for 3 set, and then operates for 10 set and stops. Operates for i0 set, stops for 3 set, and then operates for 10 set and stops. Rotates for 10 set at standard speed (138 mm/.sec) for plain paper (64 to 104 g), for 10 set at standard speed (90 mm/set) for thick paper (157 g), for 10 set at standard speed (68 mm/set) for ultra thick paper (209 g), for 10 set at gloss speed (45 mm/set) for ultra thick paper (209 g), and stops for 3 sec. Operates for an equivalent of 2 rotations of the belt and stops for 3 set; then, operates for an equivalent of 2 rotations, and stops. Rotates for IO set at standard speed (138 mm/set) for plain paper (64 to 104 g), for 10 set at standard speed (90 mm/set) for thick paper (157 g), for 10 set at standard speed (68 mm/set) for ultra thick paper (209 g), for 10 set at gloss speed (45 mm/see) for ultra thick paper (209 g), and stops for 3 sec. Rotates for 10 set at standard speed (138 mm/set) for plain paper (64 to 104 g), for 10 set at standard speed (90 mm/set) for thick paper (157 g), for 10 set at standard speed (68 mm/set) for ultra thick paper (209 g), for 10 set at gloss speed (45 mm/set) for ultra thick paper (209 g), and stops for 3 sec. Operates for 10 set, stops for 3 set, and then operates for 10 set and stops. Rotates CCW/CW for 10 set, stops for 3 see, rotates CCW for 10, and then stops. Cleans by a single back-and-forth trip. Operates for 5 set and then stops.
Ml4 (transfer belt motor) (Note 1) Ml 1 (pre-fixing feeding motor) (Note 1)
Buffer path unit motor (Note 1)
10 11 12 13
Ml 9 (duplexing unit feeding motor) (Note 1) Ml 5 (polishing/oil removing motor) (Note 1) M24Y, M24M, M24C, M24Bk (primary wire cleaning motor) Fixing web motor
Note 1: Its operation stops in response to a press on the Stop key.
3-296
No.
Motor Ml 2 (transfer cleaner web motor) M2 (image position slope correction motor for Y) M3 (image position ratio correction motor for Y) M5 (image position slope correction motor for C) M6 (image ratio correction motor for C) M7 (image position slope correction motor for Bk) M8 (image position ratio correction motor for Bk) Ml 3 (transfer belt swing motor) M23 (duplexing unit stacking guide motor)
Control Operates for 1 set and then stops. Rotates CW for a single full turn, rotates CCW for a single turn, and then stops. Rotates CW for a single full turn, rotates CCW for a single turn, and then stops. Rotates CW for a single full turn, rotates CCW for a single turn, and then stops. Rotates CW for a single full turn, rotates CCW for a single turn, and then stops. Rotates CW for a single full turn, rotates CCW for a single turn, and then stops. Rotates CW for a single full turn, rotates CCW for a single turn, and then stops. Rotates CW for a single full turn, rotates CCW for a single turn, and then stops. Executes home position detection, stops for 3 set, moves to A4 position, stops for 3 set, moves to 84 position, stops for 3 set, moves to A4R position, stops for 3 set, moves to B5R position, stops for 3 set, and then moves to home position. Rotates for draw-in operation for 3 set, rotates for feed-out operation for 3 set, stops for 1 set, rotates for draw-in for 3 set, rotates for feed-out for 3 set, and then stops. Rotates for lifter-up operation for 3 set, and then stops. (Return the lifter by hand.) Rotates for lifter-up operation for 3 set, and then stops. (Return the lifter by hand.) Rotates for lifter-up operation for 3 set, stops for 3 set, rotates for lifter-down operation for 3 set, and then stops. Rotates for lifter-down operation for 10 set, rotates for lifter-up operation for 10 set, and then stops. Executes a single registration shutter open/close operation. Operates the image correction mirror, and generates a test pattern (PG=06, grid); then, returns the mirror to original posltion. (Each motor may be assumed to be operating normally if a discrepancy exists between the M grid and the grid of each color.) Pick-up will be from the cassette 1; be sure to put A4RTR paper in the cassette in advance.
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23
M28 (duplexing unit reversal motor)
24 25 26
Ml6 (upper cassette lifter motor) Ml 7 (lower cassette lifter motor) Ml (multifeeder lifter motor)
27
M8001 (paper deck motor)
28 29 30
Registration shutter motor Y/C/Bk image correction mirror Ratio correction motor (M3, M6, M8) Y/C/Bk image correction mirror Slant correction motor (M2, M5, M7)
3-297
n Details of FAN
Type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fan Laser cooling fan (FM4, front; FM5, rear) Primary suction fan (FM8, left; FM9, right) Primary exhaust fan (FM6) Pre-fixing feeding fan (FM7) high-speed rotation On for 5 set, continuously.
off for
Control 5 set; then, remains on
ON for 5 set, off for 5 set; then, on for 5 set and stops. On for 5 set, off for 5 set; then, on for 5 set and stops.
- On for 5 set; off for 5 set; then, on for 5 set
Pre-fixing feeding fan (FM7) low-speed rotation Delivery assembly cooling fans (FMl), 2 (FM2), 3 (FM3) high-speed rotation Delivery assembly cooling fan 1 (FMl), 2 (FM2), 3 (FM3) low-speed rotation Delivery lower cooling fan 1 (FM1 9) 2 (FM20)
and stops.
On for 5 set, off for 5 sec;then, operates continuously.
3-298
15. TCLN (polishing roller/oil removing roller operation)

-dh TCLN <EG> -6b READY <f> READY
cF>
Item KCLN
Description Use it to bring the polishing roller in contact while moving the transfer belt. The operation will stop after last rotating sequence. (for about 4 min). During operation, the notation is P SERVICE. Butts the oil removing roller against the transfer belt, and rotates both the transfer belt and the oil removing roller (for about 4 min). During operation, the notation is P SERVICE.
Remarks Stops automatically after operating for a specific period of time.
OCLN
COPYRIUHT Q lM7 CANON INC.
CANON CLMOOO REV.1 MAY 1987 PRINTEO IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-299
16. P-THICK (paper thickness sensor adjustment)

<Mz 
P-TH-1 xxxx P-TH-2 xxxx
P-THICK
<s>
<lb READY
<F>
mm
m FUNC
Item P-TH-1 I2
Description Indicates the output characteristics of the paper thickness sensor set at time of shipment from the factory. Enters the characteristics (A through E) of the paper thickness sensor to be installed newly.
Remarks
SNSR-RNK
Values A through E change by toggle operation.
3-300
COPYAlOHTO1997 CANON INC.
CANONCLClOOO REV.lMAY1997 PRlNTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
17. IMG-REG (image position correction control)
<M> I M G - R E G cs> II2
<R> READY

<F>
Item AUTO-ADJ
Description Use it to execute the series of operations for image position correction control. READY + SERVICE + READY Use it to indicate the start position of reading the pattern for M. Use it to indicate the start position of writing the pattern for M. F: Front. R: Rear. Use it to correct the write start position of the pattern for Y/C/K. (rough adjustment in main scanning direction)
Remarks 1 min 30 set (approx.)
M-READ M-W-F M-W-R
Y/C/K-REG-H
A higher setting shifts the pattern to the rear.
1 pixel (63.5um) Settings: 0 to 255 Standard: 128 Y/C/K-REG-HS Use it to correct the write start position of the pattern for Y/C/K. (fine adjustment in main scanning direction) Use it to correct the write start position of the pattern for Y/C/K. (sub scanning direction)
,::chlutlqn: .:I20 not use thls MI unles@ Eli44 Is Indicated ,_ .~(errorthat disablirs Imagi@ position owrectlon).
Unit: l/4 pixel Settings: 0 to 3 Standard: 0 A higher setting will shift the pattern to the trailing
Leading
Y/C/K-REG-V
edge - %Fg
Fzgm directlon
edge. 1 pixel (635um) Unit: Settings: 0 to 255 Standard: 128

COPYRIQHT 0 1997 CANON INC. CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPDN)
3401
<bfb I M G - R E G <s> 2J2
<Rz R E A D Y

<F>
Item REG-ERR-FLG
Description
1
Indicates how the image position correction pattern is read. 0:OOOO through 7:0000 corresponds to 8 sets of patterns. (0000 indicates the absence of an error; if an error is found in all 8 sets, El94 will be indicated. If any of the sets is 0000, its data will be used for correction.)
0:016A
4-bit data is assigned to each color data, and a 1 is assigned where an error exists.
front sub scanning rear main scanning rear sub scanning In the case of the above, an error exists on the pattern for C of set 1 at front in sub scanning direction and at rear in main scanning direction.
3-302
E. OPTION (options mode)

CM> <s> 
1 2 3 1 4 1
I
R-OPT P-OPT REMOTE DECK

I
Selects reader-related machine settings. Adjusts the cleaning mode transfer drum stop position. Sets conditions for connection with an external controller. Sets conditions for connection with a paper deck. Use it to disconnect the copy Data Controller-Al.
DATA-CON
3403
1. R-OPT (reader-related machine settings) <M>

R-OPT <s> <ib R E A D Y -d+ READY <F>
1 OPTION
Item P-SIZE (Note 1)
Description Identifies the size of copy paper and transparency of the copier.
Remarks 0: AB-configuration 1: Inch-configuration 2: A-configuration 3: All Standard: 0 0: Not available 1: Available
METAL (Note 1) CONTROL (Note 1) DF-AUTO (Note 1)
Determines whether to use or not metal mode in user mode. Reserved Enables or disables auto start for manual pickup in the RF. 0: Disable auto start. 1: Enable auto start. Use it to bring the hues closer to those of professional printing. 0: Standard 1: Professional printing If MANAGE is set to I, the Pro Print key will be indicated on the user mode-screen.
Standard: 1
MANAGE
standard: 0 For fine-adjustment, see the descriptions for AJDUST+COL-ADJ+PTBL-M/C/Y/K.
Note 1: You must enter the appropriate value whenever you have replaced reader controller PCB or initialized a RAM; record any new values on the service label for this purpose.
I, ._\ Rerfercance; Overhead projectors may be either a reflecting Q& or a tra&&ng.typk. It k&to lowei theoow * Image maximum den&y for a transmitting type P;rojector. CMnge th6 value aocordlng to the typ6 Of ;: , %_ projector used by the user.
3-304
COPYRIOHT (B 1997 CANON INC.
2. P-OPT (cleaning mode)

<M> P-OPT 4% et?> READY -d> READY <F>
OPTION
Item T-WEB (Note 1) TBLT-POS (Note 1) F-WEB-MD
Description Changes the frequency at which the transfer belt cleaning web turns on. Changes the stop position of the transfer belt.
Remarks Settings: l-5 Unit: Standard: 3 Settings: -2-2 Unit: 2 mm Standard: 0 Standard: 1
Changes the ON/OFF sequence of the web solenoid when the fixing web solenoid is turned on. At present, the setting is always 1. Changes the frequency at which the fixing web solenoid turns on; once for n of small-size copies. Use it to set the copy count at which copy count should start. For instance, if set to loo, the counter 3 will start to count in response to a press on the Copy Start key as long as the copy count is set to 100 or higher.
F-WEB (Note 1) CONTSET (Note 1)
Settings: l-255 Standard: 8 Settings: O-999 Standard: 100 The setting is effective only if DISPlAY+VERSION-GNT-MODE=7 (111).
Note 1:
The value will return to the standard value when the RAM is initialized, requiring re-input. Be record any new value on the service label.
Sure to
COPYRlOHTQ1@Q7
CANONINC.
CANONCLClOOO
REV.lMAYlQQ7
PRINl'EDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAU JAPON)
3405
3. REMOTE (machine settings with IPU in use)
r
OPTION
CM> R E M O T E <$>
<R> R E A D Y
 R E A D Y
<F>
I t e m REMOTE
Description Make the settings shown in A and 6 (table below): A: Use it to specify whether the Call key should have a remote function. If it is not used as a remote key, a command from the IPU starts remote state and then local state after execution. B: Use it to specify whether copying modes set in local state should be maintained when moving from local state to remote state. C: Determines whether to retain copying modes set in local mode when switching from local to remote mode.
Remarks Settings: O-7 Standard: 0
n Details of Settings A REMOTE = 0,l Keep as Call key. Keep as Call key. Use as Remote key. Use as Remote key. Use as Remote key. Use as Remote key. B Retain Do not retain Retain Retain Do not retain Do not retain
6
7
Note 1:
You must enter the appropriate value whenever you have replaced the reader controller PCB or initialized a RAM; record any new values on the service label for this purpose.
3-306
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1497 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPW
4. Settings for the Paper Deck

<hb DECK CR> READY 
Item DECK-SET (Note 1)
Description Specifies the presence/absence of a paper deck. 0: Absent 1: Present Selects the size of paper used in the paper deck. Each press on the key scans through the sizes as follows:
Remarks Standard: 1
DECK-P (Note 1)
Standard: A4
Note 1: You must enter the appropriate value whenever you have replaced the reader controller PCB or initialized a RAM; record any new values on the service label for this purpose.
5. DATA-CON (disconnecting the Copy Data Controller-Al)
Item B-CLR
Description Connecting the Copy Data Controller-Al will automatically sets it to 1. Be sure to set it to 0 when temporarily separating the Copy Data Controller-Al during service work.
Remarks E717 will be indicated If ou separate the Copy b ata Controller-Al without settin it to Oratlng the Copy % ata ControllerAl dunng service work.
3-307
F. TEST PRINT (test print)

<I+ READY CP> READY
<Fz
Item
Description
I Generates test prints.
I I
Remarks
<M> PG
<R> READY
CP> READY
<F> 4
O P T I O N
Item TXPH
Description Switches between text mode and photo mode. 0: Text mode 1: Photo mode 2: Auto switching Not valid if TYPE is set to 6 (grid). Switches the gate array of the laser controller PCB. Not valid if TYPE is set to 5 (halftone). 0: Use gate array 1: Do not use gate array
Operation Each press causes the following sequential change.
THRU
Each press causes the setting to alternate between 0 and 1.
3-308
Item WPE
Description Selects the type of test print.
Remarks Enter the appropriate number (1 through 16) using the keypad, and press the Copy Start key to generate test prints. In the case of 3, 4, 5, or 6, the color may be selected in color mode (user mode). l Be sure to return the setting to 0 after generating the test print.
DENS-M/C/Y/K COLOR-Y/M/C/K
Selects the density of each color for full face halftone for PGTYPE=5. Use it to select the color to generate for each PG. 1: Generate. 0: Do not generate.
O-255 Standard: 126 Standard value: 1
Be sure to set
TYPE back to 0 when leaving test print mode.
3409
- 3. OiJERATIONS AND TIMING
G. COUNTER (counter)
<M> cs> .
READY Cp> READY
cF>
<031> <032> co33> <034> co35> <036> co37> ~038~ ~039s &lo>
m
m
COUNTER
m
m!B!I!m <014>
m
<023> <024> <025> ~026~ <027> Co287 <02Q> <030>
. After 999999, the reading returns to 000000. When a Level 3 item (except 038, 039,040) is pressed and the Clear key is pressed after theitem has been highlighted, the counter reading of the item will return to 00000. . Check the value of Level 3 item 038 whenever you have replaced the cleaning web of the fixing assembly. If not 0, press E005RLS under FUSER of FUNC to clear the counter reading. In addition, executing RAM-CLR for the reader controller PCB will reset all readings of the Level 3 items to 000000 (except 038, 039, 040).
l
3-310
COPYRlOHTQlQQ7 CANON INC.
CANONCLClOOOREV.1MAY1QQ7PRlNTEOIN JAPAN(IMPRIME AUJAFON)
Indicates the number of times the Y developing
Indicates the number of copies made projector. (reserved)
assembly has been used.
Indicates the number of 3
Indicates the number of sheets picked up from
010
lndlcates the number of sheets plcked up from the multlfeeder.
038
Indicates the number of times the solenoid has turned ON from when the absence of web has been detected until E005 Is lndicated.(lnltlatly, 270; incremented by 1 for each actlvatk)n) Indicates the number of copies to be made Until the next time the prlmary charging wire automatic cleaning mechanism turns on. (Inltlally, SOOG; count down by 1 per copy) Indicates the number of copies to be made UnUl the next time the pollshlng roller cleaning meChenlsnl turns on.(lnltlally, 5000; count down by 1 per Cow)
019
Indicates the number of sheets plcked up from the dupledng unit.
039
020
Indicates the number of scans made by the scanner.
040
3411
VII. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT

1 1 1 When Replacing Major Parts
1
a. When Replacing the ROM on the DC Controller PCB or the Reader Controller PCB (The term reader controller- or the DC controller within parentheses indicates work unique to the respective PCB.) 1) Turn on the main switch. 2) Record the settings of the user mode. (reader controller) 3) Set IMG-REG on the second page of the INSTALLL screen under FUNC in service mode from 1 to 0. (DC controller) 4) Turn off the main switch. 5) Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet. (DC controller)
PASCAL under ADJSUT in service mode to 1. b. When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB 1) lnitialize the RAM on the reader controller PCB. (See the appropriate instructions.) Turn off and on the main switch. 2)
C. 1)
When Replacing the DC Controller PCB Start service mode, and check to make sure that DISP+BLT-DRFT+BELTPOS is CENTER; if not, move the transfer belt to the center. Turn off the main switch. Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet. *
6) Replace the two ROMs of the DC controller

and the six ROMs of the reader controller. Connect the power plug to the power outlet, 7) and turn on the main switch. 8) Execute RAM-CLR of R-CON under FUNC in service mode so that the main switch will automatically be off. 8) Turn on the main switch so that E350 will be indicated. (reader controller) 10) Execute AUTO-ADJ of CCD under FUNC in service mode. (about 8 min; reader controller) 11) If a projector is installed, execute PROJ-CCD of PROJ-ADJ under FUNC in service mode. (reader controller) 12) Compare the value in A of the service label and the service mode value; if different, or if you replaced the DC controller PCB as a whole, perform the steps for initializing the RAM on the DC controller PCB shown below. (DC controller) 13) Set IMG-REG of INSTALL2 under FUNC in service mode from 0 to 1. (DC controller) 14) Enter new user mode settings and the value of B of service label. (reader controller) 15) Turn off and on the main switch. 16) Execute auto gradation correction, and set
4) Replace the DC controller PCB. 5) Remove the connector used for short-circuiting from J2237 of the old DC controller PCB; then, install it to J2237 on the new DC controller PCB. 6) Turn on the main switch. 7) lnitialize the RAM on the DC controller PCB. (See the appropriate instructions.) 8) Turn on and then off the DC controller PCB. d. lnltlallzlng the RAM on the DC Controller PCB Start service mode, and check to make sure 1) that BELT-POS of BLT-DRFT under DISP is CENTER; if not, move the transfer belt to the center. 2) Execute FUNC+DC-CON+RAM-LR In service mode. 3) Turn off the main switch, and disconnect and then connect the power plug (so that the RAM , will be cleared). Turn on the main switch. 4) 5) If you have replaced the DC controller PCB, replace the developer according to the instructions on the Service handbook P2-13. 6) Enter the value of A recorded on the service label. (If you have changed other servlce mode settings related to the DC controller, enter such settings as well.) 7) Turn off and then on the main switch. 8) Execute BEG-APER of INSTALL2 under FUNC in service mode.
3-312
COPYRIQHT819~7CANONINC.
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAYlQQ7 PRINTEOINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
Service Mode Settings Related to the DC Controller PC6 ADJUST Settings on PASCAL screen Settings on FEED-ADJ screen Settings on ENV-SET screen Settings on HV-TR Y/M/C/K screen Settings on HV-SP screen Settings on HV-FS screen Settings on HV-EL screen Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings on on on on on DC-CON screen P-UP-TMG P-THICK screen IMG-REG screen FUSER screen
Service Mode Settings Related to the Reader Controller ADJUST Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings screen Settings Settings on on on on on on on ADJ-XY screen DOC-REC screen PROJ screen ED/RF screen COL-ADJ screen ADJ-MIS screen PRJ-ADJ screen
OPTION FUNC
on R-OPT screen of ON-SET on R-OPT on REMOTE screen on DECK screen
OPTION
Settings on P-OPT screen (except ON-SET)
The above service mode settings are cleared when the RAM on the reader controller is initialized. f. When Replacing the Image Position Correction CCD Unit 1) After replacing the image position correction CCD unit, execute FUNC+INSTALL (2nd screen)+REG-APER in service mode. Thereafter, be sure to turn off and on the power switch to correct the image position.
The above settings on the screens of service mode are cleared when the RAM on the DC controller PCB is initialized. e. lnitializing the RAM on the Reader Controller PCB 1) Record thesettings of user mode. 2) Execute FUNC+R-CON+RAM-CLR in service mode. (The main switch will automatically turn off.) 3) Turn on the main switch. (E350 will be indicated.) 4) Execute FUNC+CCD+AUTO-ADJ in service mode. (about 8 min) 5) If a projector is installed, execute FUNC+PROJ-ADJ+PROJ-CCD in service mode. 8) Enter any new user mode settings and the settings recorded in B of the service label. (If you have changed any other service mode settings related to the reader controller, enter such settings.)
g. When Replacing the Paper Thickness Sensor 1) Check the settings (A through E) recorded on the label attached to the paper thickness sensor you are replacing, and record them under SNSR-RNK on the service label. At this time, you need not perform step 3) and the subsequent steps if the settings are the same as the settings under FUNC+P-THICK+SNSRRNK of service mode. Replace the power thickness sensor. 2) Enter the settings you recorded on the service 3) label in step 1) under FUNC+P-THICK+SNSR-RNK in service mode. (Each press on SNSR-RNK toggles the settings A through E.) 4) Check to make sure that the values of P-TH1 and P-TH-2 are identical to the VdUeS recorded on the service label; If dlfferent, enter the correct values uslng FUNC-DCCON (5/5)-+P-TH-l/2 in service mode. 5) End service mode.
COPYRlOHTOlQQ7
CANON INC.
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY1897 PRlNlEOINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
3-313
h 1) 2) 3)
4) 5)
6) 7) 8)
After Replacing the Pick-Up Motor/Pick-Up Unit Place three or more A4 or LTR sheets of paper in the cassette (upper, lower). Select FUNC + P-UP-TMG in service mode. Execute PK-ADJ-U three times. l A value near 186 will be indicated under DATA-A and PUDT-U. Press D-SEND-U to write the adjustment data in RAM. Execute PK-ADJ-L three times. l A value near 104 will be indicated under DATA-L and PUDT-C. Press D-SEND-C to write the adjustment data in RAM. Write the value of PUDT-UR on the service label. End service mode.
Checking the Environment Measurement PCB
The condition of the environment measurement PC6 and the environment sensor is checked using the environment measurement checking tool (TKN-0457) and the environment checking tool (TKN-0456). a. Checking the Environtient Measurement PCB 1) Turn off the power switch. 2) Remove the multitray covers 1 and 2. 3) Remove. the environment sensor from the environment measurement PCB, and insert the environment measurement checking tool (TKN-0457) in its place. 4) Turn on the power switch. 5) Set the meter to the 30 VDC range, and check to make sure that the voltage of Jl-1 (+) and Jl-2 (-) on the environment measurement PC6 is 24 V &2.4V. If not, check the DC power supply PC6 (DCPl). 6) Start service mode, and select DISPLAY. 7) Check the temperature and humidity on the ANALOG screen. BODY C ..*........... 5 *5 BODY % . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 *lO 8) Check to make sure that the reading is within specification. If not, go to step 9). If the reading is as indicated, go to step 14). 9) Press the Reset key, and turn off the power switch. 10) Disconnect Jl of the environment measurement PCB. 11) Turn on the power switch; start service mode, and select DISPLAY. 12) Check the temperature and humidity on the ANALOG screen. BODY C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 *5 BODY % . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 zt10 13) Check to make sure that the reading is as indicated.
3-314
CANON CLCIDIIO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
14) Press the Reset key. 15) Turn off the power switch. 16) Connect Jl of the environment measurement PCB. 17) Remove the environment measurement sensor from the environment measurement PCB, and insert the environment sensor. 16) Install all covers. b. Checking the Environment Sensor 1) Check the environment PCB. 2) Turn on the power switch, and leave it on for 5 min. Start service mode, and select DISPLAY. 3) Check the temperature and humidity on the 4) ANALOG screen. BODY C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data Al BODY % . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data A2 5) Press the Reset key, and turn off the power switch. 6) Remove the environment sensor from the environment measurement PCB, and insert the environment sensor calibration tool (TKN0456) in its place. 7) Turn on the service switch, and leave it on for 5 min. 6) Start service mode, and select DISPLAY. 3) Check the temperature and humidity on the ANALOG screen. (data B) BODY C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data Bl BODY % . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . data B2 10) Compare data A and data B l The difference between data Al and data Bl is 0 *5. l The difference between data A and data B is 0 *20. If the difference is outside the specification, replace the environment sensor. 11) Press the Reset key, and turn off the power switch. 12) Remove the environment sensor calibration tool from the environment measurement PCB, and insert the environment sensor. 13) Install all covers.
Checking the High Voltage Control System
a. Outline lf an image fault occurs, you must first determine whether the cause is the latent static formation block which includes the photosensitive drum and the potential control system or the developing/transfer system. The CLClOOOs high-voltage is controlled to a specific level using the environment sensor and the potential sensor. Sensor Environment sensor Potential sensor Environment sensor Primary grid bias Transfer blade bias Separation charging bias Primary grid bias Developing bias
b. Target Contrast Potential The primary grid bias or the developing bias control mechanism may be checked by canceling the auto setting mechanism by the environment sensor for target contrast potential. 1) Select VCONT of ADJ-MISC under ADJUST in service mode. 2) Select an appropriate value from the target contrast voltage levels in the following table, and enter it.
COPYRIDHT 8 1897 CANON INC.
341s
Y Auto 390.00 390.00 390.00 370.00 340.00 310.00 295.00 245.00
M Auto 365.00 365.00 365.00 345.00 325.00 295.00 275.00 225.00
c Auto 370.00 370.00 370.00 355.00 335.00 315.00 290.00 225.00
K Auto 420.00 420.00 420.00 410.00 390.00 380.00 370.00 330.00
3) Execute EPC under FUNC in service mode. 4) Make copies, an,d check the images. . If the image is better, suspect a fault in the environment sensor or the environment measurement PCB. 5) Return the setting of VONT of ADJ-MISC under ADJUST in service mode to 0.
3-316
COPYRIGHT (D 1997 CANON INC.
Checking the Photointerrupters
2.Using Service Mode 1) Start service mode.

Press DISP. 3) Press SENSOR. 4) Make checks as indicated.
2)
The CLClOOO allows you to use a conventional meter or service mode when checking its photointerrupters.
1. Using a Meter 1) Set the meter to the 30VDC range. 2) Connect the - probe of the meter to JlOl-7
(GND) of the DC control PCB. 3) Connect the + probe to the terminals (on the DC controller PCB or the deck controller PCB) shown on the pages that follow. 4) Make checks according to the instructions given.
-+I> S E N S O R <S> DlSP m mm 8 0 0 0 0 0 H XXXXXXXX 800001H x x x x x x x x 800002H xxxxxxxx 800003H xxxxnxx XXXXXXXX 800004H 800005H XxxxxxxX
<R>READY 801OOoH 801001H 801002H 801003H 801004H 801005H
READY
<F> xxxxxxxx
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
xxxxxxxx
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
I-
xxxxxxxx
802000H 80200 1 H 802002H 802063H 802004H 802005H
xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
Addkss
bit 7
bii 0
4) Set the laser power checker switch to 2.
CANON CM1000 REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3917
Meter probe (+) Sensor Name Service mode Registration paper sensor J2207A-13 801000 Multifeeder lifter ~22078-5 sensor (upper) 801004 Multifeeder lifter sensor (lower)
~2207~_1 1
Checks During copying, 1 if paper is present over the registration paper sensor. l 0 if absent.
l
PS 1
bit 0
PS 2
bit 2
After the multifeeder has been, selected and the Copy Start key has been pressed, 1 when the lifter of the multifeeder moves up. During standby, 1 if the lifter of the multifeeder is down.
PS 3
801004 Multifeeder paper sensor (front) Multifeeder paper sensor (rear) Oil level sensor PS 6 802002 Holding tray front feeding sensor 1 Holding tray front feeding sensor 2 Transfer belt cleaning web rotation sensor J2214B-2 801061 J2214B-5 801001 J2218A-7 J2207B-12 801005 J2207B-13 801005 J2209A-13
bit 3 During standby, 1 when paper is set in the multifeeder. bit 0 During standby, 1 when paper is set in the multifeeder. bit 1
l l
PS4
PS 5
1 if the arm is over the sensor. 0 otherwise.
bit 2
l
PS8
1 if paper is present over the holding tray front feeding sensor. 0 if absent. 0 if paper is present over the holding tray front feeding sensor 2. 1 if absent.
bit 6
l
PS 9
bit 7 Slide out the transfer unit, and open the transfer belt assembly. Close the transfer belt assembly by blocking the light of PSlO by paper; and set the transfer unit to the copier. l 1 when the power is ON. l 0 when the light is not blocked. Slide out the transfer unit, and open the transfer belt assembly. Close the transfer belt assembly by blocking the light of PSll by paper; and Set the transfer unit to the copier. l 1 when the power is ON. l 0 when the light Is not blocked.
PS 10
802003 Transfer belt cleaning web length sensor
bit 7
J2218A-8
PS 11
802002
bit 3
3-318
CANON CLC1999 REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRI$E
AU JAPUNl
Meter probe (+) Sensor Name Service mode Transfer belt lifter sensor 1 J2218A-5 802003 Transfer belt lifter sensor 2 J2218A-6 802003 Post registration paper sensor Separation sensor J2218A-13 801001 J2218B-1 801001 Transfer belt home position sensor Transfer belt edge sensor 1 (front) Transfer belt edge sensor 1 (rear) Transfer belt edge sensor 2 (front) Transfer belt edge sensor 2 (rear) Pick-up vertical path 1 sensor J2219B-1 802003 J2219B-2 802003 J2219B-3 802003 J2219B-7 802003 J2219B-8 802003 J2222B-5 801000 Paper deck connection sensor J2222B-6 800004 bit 0 bit 1 1 when the paper deck is set in the copier. bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 6 bit 1 During standby, 1 when the transfer belt joint detecting seal is present over the PS16. l 0 when absent. During standby, 1 when the detecting lever is present over PS17. l 0 when absent. During standby, 1 when the detecting lever is present over PS19. l 0 when absent. During standby, 1 when the detecting lever is present over PS19. . 0 when absent. During standby, 1 when the detecting lever is present over PS20. l 0 when absent. . 1 when paper is present over the pick-up vertical path 1 sensor. l 0 when absent. bit 0 bit 1 During copying, 1 when paper is present over the post registration paper sensor. l 0 when absent. . 1 when paper is present over the separation sensor. l 0 when absent. bit 0
l
Checks . 1 when the transfer belt is moved down under FUNC in service mode. l 0 when moved up. 0 when the transfer belt is moved down under FUNC in service mode. . 1 when moved up.
S 12
S 13
S 14
S 15
S 16
PS 18
PS 19.
PS 20
PS 21
PS 22
CANON CLClO99 REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3419
Meter probe (+) Sensor Name Service mode Cassette 1 paper sensor J2222B-7 801004 bit 0 During standby, slide out the cassette 1. 1 when the cassette is slidout. l 0 when the cassette is slid in. Pick-up vertical path 2 sensor 1 when paper is present over the pick-up vertical path 2 sensor. 0 when absent. 1 when paper is present over the pick-up During standby, slide out the cassette 1. 1 when the cassette is slid in with paper. l 0 when the cassette is slid in without paper.
l
PS 23
PS 24
PS 25
PS 26
Pick-up vertical path 3 sensor
PS 27
Cassette 2 lifter sensor
1 when paper is present over the. pick-up vertical path 3 sensor. 0 when absent.
PS 28
Cassette 2 paper sensor
J2222B-11 801005 bit 5
During standby, l 1 when the cassette 2 is slid out. l 0 when the cassette 2 is slid in. During standby, 1 when the cassette is slid in with paper. l 0 when the cassette is slid in without paper. During standby, slide out the duplexing unit, and remove the front cover. l 1 when the duplexing unit is slid in and the light-blocking plate is over the sensor. l 0 otherwise.
PS 29
Duplexing unit stacking guide home position sensor Holding tray paper sensor 1
I
I
J2224B-8 801004 J2224A-5 80 1002 bit 0 bit 6
PS 30
i
PS 31
Holding tray paper sensor 2
During standby, 0 when paper is put over the holding tray paper sensor 2. 801005 bit 7 t . 1 otherwise. J2224A-8
l
PS 32
Delivery Vertical path sensor 2
1 when paper is present over the delivery
3-320
COPYRlQHTQlQQl CANONINC.
CANONCLdlOOO REV.lMAYlQQ7 PRlNTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
Meter probe (+) Sensor Name Service mode Duplexing reversal sensor J2211A-10 801001 Delivery sensor PS 34 801001 Internal delivery sensor
Jzzl 1
Checks 1 when paper is present in the duplexing reversing assembly. l 0 when absent. bit 5
l
PS 33
J2211A-11 bit 3
1 when paper is put over the delivery sensor. 0 otherwise. 1 when paper is put over the internal delivery sensor. 0 otherwise.
R-5 bit 2
PS 35
801001 Upper web length sensor J2209A-2 802002 Scanner home position sensor
PS 36
bit 3
During standby, 1 when the detecting lever is put over the sensor. l 0 otherwise. During standby, remove the copyboard glass. 1 when the light-blocking plate is put over PS37. 1 when paper is put over the delivery vertical path sensor 1. 0 otherwise.
Reader unit controller J1306A-5
PS 37
PS 38
Delivery vertical path sensor 1
Jzzl 18-8
801002 Pattern reading ~2241-4 assembly shutter closed sen804004 sor Pattern reading assembly shutter open sensor Paper deck paper absent sensor J2241-7 804004 J2223A-7 801005
bit3 Execute FUNC + F-MISCp + MTR in service mode to operate the shutter. PS39: 1 at first; 0 when operation starts; then, 1 in about 10 sec. . PS40: 0 at first: 1 about 5 set after operation; then, 0 once again.
PS 39
bit 6
PS 40
bit 7
l l
PS 8001
1 if paper is in the paper deck. 0 otherwise.
bit 6
COPYRlQHT819~7CANONINC.
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY1997 PRINTEOINJAPAN(IMPRIME AUJAPON)
3-321
VIII. TEST PRINTS

The CLClOOO possesses nine types of test print patterns, enabling identification of an error in reference to each test print pattern. If a fault on a copy made normally does not appear on a test print, you may suspect the original exposure system, CCD, analog processor, or image processor.
GTYPE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Description Image from CCD (regular copying) For R&D 256 colors 256 gradations i7 gradations Total halftone page Grid For image position correction For R&D For R&D MCYBk horizontal stripe (laser FF activation) For R&D For R&D For R&D Full color in 17 gradations Not used Not used For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D
,
1. Selecting a Test Pattern 1) Set the copy count and copy size.
2)
3) 4) 5) 6)
7)
8)
Start service mode. (* + 2, 8 + *) Press TEST. Select PG -+ TYPE. Enter the appropriate PG number using the keypad. Set the color mode. l COLOR-Y/M/UK=1 selects a color. *Effective when PGTYPE=2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. Set the density of the test print*. l Set the density using the DENS-Y/M/C/K key. *Effective when PGTYPE=5. Press the Copy Start key.
Table 3-301
3-322
2. 256~Color Test Print (PGTYPE=02)

Use the 256-color test print to check the hues. For the 256-color test print, the 16x16 frames from the leading edge of the copy paper represent 256 colors; all frames that follow are repetitions of the first set.
Hues of the 256 Colors The print must show the hues shown in Figure 3-l 106. If the hues are different, suspect deterioration of the developer, deterioration of the photosensitive drum, and mixing of developers.
a.
Lb 16 frames _(
Figure 3-1106
COPYRIGHT01997 CANON INC.
CANON CLClOOOREV.1MAY1997 PRlNTEOINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAU
JAPON)
3-323
3. 256-Gradation Test Print (PGTYPE=03)

Use the 256-gradation test print to check gradation and balance between colors. a. Gradation You may check the gradation of all densities from density 0 to density 255.
b. Balance between Colors (3-color copying) Select 3-color mode, and generate a test print to check the gray balance of all densities from density 0 to density 255. Note: ,,, , I&e user mode to rn$!e a&&~ op&col$; .(.- , , , selection., .I,; ,:- ,. , 1 :
,.
Lb 16 frames -4
3-324
COPYRlGHTQ1997CANONINC.
CANON CLCiOOOAEV.l MAY1997 PRlNfEOINJAPAN(IhlPRIMEAUJAPON)
4. 17-Gradation Test Print (PGTYPE=04)

Use the 17-gradation test print to check gradation, fogging, white lines, uneven density between left and right, and balance between colors.
a. Gradation
If the gradation of density is not as shown in Figure 3-l 108, suspect a fault in the developing assembly or the laser system.
b. Fogging
If fogging is over the section of 00 activation in Figure 3-l 108, suspect a fault in the developing system or the photosensitive drum; or, the laser may not be adjusted correctly.
Figure 3-1108
COPYRIGHT@ 1697 CANONINC.
CANON CLClOOOAEV.lMAYlQQ7
PRlNTEOINJAPAN(IhlPRIME
AUJAPON)
3-325
5. Halftone Test Print (PGTYPE=OS)

Use the halftone test print to check transfer faults (failure), black lines, white lines, and uneven intervals.
a. Transfer Faults (failure)
d. Uneven Intervals
If a transfer fault is noted, suspect a fault in the transfer belt or the static eliminating assembly.
b. Black Lines
If black lines are noted, suspect scratches on the photosensitive drum or dirt on the primary charging wire. c. White Lines
If uneven intervals occur, suspect the following: . If at intervals of about 0.5 mm, suspect the scanner*. If at intervals of about 38 mm, suspect the developing cylinder. . If at intervals of about 1.6 mm, suspect the drive gear. *Will not occur on test prints.
l
occur in one color only, suspect a fault in the developing assembly.
Figure 3-1109
3-326
6. Grid Test Print (PGNPE=06)

Use the grid test print to check color displacement, right angles, and straight lines. a. Color Displacement If color displacement is noted, suspect a fault in the transfer belt. Color displacement on this test print does not necessarily mean color displacement on regular copies because of black text processing. The mechanisms are normal as long as color displacement is not noted on regular copies. (Use this test to find out the location of displacement
and the color if color displacement is noted on regular copies.) b. Right Angles/Straight Lines If a fault is noted in relation to right angles or straight lines, suspect a displaced laser beam or a fault in the beam detection mechanism.
Figure 3-l 110
3-327
7. Image Position Correction Pattern (PGTYPE=07)

Use this test print to check whether the image position correction pattern is normal or otherwise.
pattern .M pattern -!+ +___ .C pattern Bk pattern
e-
Figure 3-1111
3-328
8. Horizontal Stripe (FF activation) Test Print (PGTY PE=l 0)

Use the horizontal stripe test print to check the dark area density of each color, balance between colors, and white lines (development).
a. Dark Area Density of Each Color and Balance between Colors
the developing assembly,for cyan.
c.
11 uneven density occurs between left and right for all colors, suspect dirt on the butting block, and a fault in the height of the primary charging wire.
d. Image Position (left/right)
Uneven Density between Left and Right .*
The density must not be appreciably light. If a mono color copy is light, suspect a fault in the developer or the transfer blade. If the density is light for all colors, suspect a fault in the up/down movement of the transfer belt.
b. White Lines (development)
If the position of the cassette holder or the setting of REG-X, Y is wrong, the registration
between the copy paper and the image (left/right)
will have a discrepancy, eliminating the nonimage width, possibly causing stray toner and soiling the inside of the machine.
For instance, if white lines are noted in the cyan area of the copied image, suspect a fault in 2.5*1.5 mm 4 T
Figure 3-1112
2.&l .O mm
+I P-
COPYRlOHT81997CANONINC.
CANON CLClOOO REV.lMAY1997 PRlNTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
3429
m
I
9.
Full Color 17-Gradation (YMCBk+RGB+gray) Test Print (PGTYPE=14)
b. Gradation
Use the full-color l7-gradation test print to check gray balance, gradation of YMCBk, and gradation of RGB mono, and fogging.
a. Gray Balance
Check to make sure that each color is reproduced at an even density over the gray scale. To make adjustments, use the contrast potential.
Check gradation of YMCBk and RGB mono and difference in density. c. Fogging If fogging is noted in the white area, suspect a fault in the developing assembly or the photosensitive drum; or, the laser may not be adjusted correctly.
Y M, C
gray scale
Y C
Y, M, C,Bk
Gradatoin of Bk
1,
Figure 3-1113
3-330
XIV. SELF DIAGNOSIS

The microprocessor on the CLClOOOs image processor and DC controller PCB is equipped with a mechanism to check the condition of the machine (sensors, in particular). The mechanism runs a check as necessary and indicates the presence of an error upon detection. Code Cause See the descriptions that follow. See the tables that follow for descriptions of codes; you may check these codes using JAM/ERROR under DISPLAY in service mode. 0001 will be used for the detailed code column of errors without a detailed code.
Description xx represents the heater. xx=01 : upper heater xx=O2: lower heater xx01 The overheating detection circuit on the DC controller PCB has detected an overheating condition (220C or more). The thermistor has detected 210C or more.
Fixing thermistor (short circuit) Triac (short circuit) DC controller PCB (faulty)
xx02
EOOO
Fixing thermistor (poor contact, open circuit) Fixing heater (open circuit) Triac (faulty) DC controller PCB (faulty)
xx20 When control is to 160C or less, a rise in temperature of 10C or more does not occur within 4 min. xx40 The temperature drops to 140C or less during temperature control for standby. xx50 The temperature drops to 140C or less during temperature control for printing.
COPYRlQHTQ1997
CANONINC.
CANON CLClOOOREV.1 MAY1987 PRlNlEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
3431
Code
Cause 061
Description The triac is ON after the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB has turned ON the fixing heater triac drive signal. The triac is ON after the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB has turned OFF the triac drive signal for the drum heater.
E004
Triac (short circuit) 002
E005 E006
Cleaning web (inside fixing assembly; taken up) * Web length sensor (PS36; faulty) l DC controller PCB (faulty)
l l l l
The cleaning web solenoid has turned ON 270 times after the web length sensor detected the lever. 0001 The fixing drawer connector connection signal CONNECT goes 0 when the front door is closed (i.e., the door connector is disconnected). The fixing lever switch signal F-KBLK goes 1 when the front door is closed (i.e., the fixing knob is not set). The rotation speed of the motor has deviated from a specific value for 0.1 set or more. The rotation speed of the waste toner feeding motor has deviated from a specific value for 0.1 set or more (PLL signal 0). The waste toner lock detection switch (SW4) has been pressed for 0.1 set or more.
Fixing drawer connector (fault) Fixing lever switch (SW5; fault) DC controller PCB (fault)
0002
E0.12
E-J
l l l
Dr,um drive system (overload) Drum motor (M21; error) DC controller PCB (faulty) Waste toner feeding motor (faulty) Waste toner feeding screw (rotafault) DC controller PCB (faulty)
0001
0001
13
tion
0002
E014 E015
E()
. Fixing motor (M9; error)

l l
DC controller PCB (faulty)
The rotation speed of the motor has deviated from a specific value for 0.1 set or more.
l
Pick-up motor (MlO; faulty) . DC controller PCB (faulty)
17 DC faulty) controller PCB (faulty)

l l l
Duplexing feeding motor (Ml 9;
. motor The rotation speed of the duplexing feeding has deviated from a specific value for
0.1 set
l
The clock pulses of the pick-up motor cannot be detected. The rotation speed of the motor has deviated from a specific speed for 0.1 set or more.
or more (PLL signal 0).
E018
Polishing/oil removing motor (Ml 5; faulty) . DC controller PC6 (faulty)
The rotation speed of the polishing/oil removing motor has deviated from a specific value for 0.1 set or more.
Code
Cause The descriptions are by detail code.
Description Toner Density Fault xx represents the color for the developing assembly. xx=01 : Y xx=O2: M xX=03: c xx=O4: Bk The notations in the descriptions are as follows: SGNL, toner density signal; FIEF, reference signal. l Photosensitive drum (deterioration) xx3A, The variation of the following is 47 or more for 5 samplings of the density data when sampling during copying sequence: SGNL-S-Y, SGNL-S-M, SGNL-S-C, SGNL-S-K
E020
l l
SALT sensor (faulty) Stirring (developer inside developing assembly; faulty) Stray light (to sensor; no cover, front door open)
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAFON)
3433
Code
l l
Cause SALT sensor (faulty) Stirring (developer inside developing assembly; faulty) Stray light (to sensor; no cover, front door open) Photosensitive drum (deterioration) SALT sensor (soiled window, damage) Photosensitive drum (dirt; cleaning failure) xx3B
Description The variation of the following is 47 or more for 5 samplings of the density data when sampling during copying sequence: FIEF-S-Y, FIEF-S-M, REF-S-C, REFS-K When setting initial data (upon instaflation, for example), the average value after sampling of the following values is 848 or higher: SGNL-S-Y, SGNL-S-M, SGNL-S-C, SGNL-S-K; or, the value of SGNL-S-K is 352 or higher. . When setting initial data (upon installation, for example), the average value after sampling of the following values is 848 or higher: REF-S-Y, REF-S-M, REF-S-C, REFS-K; or, the value of REF-S-K is 544 or higher. When setting initial data (upon installation, for example), the value of the following is 255: SIGG-S-Y SIGG-S-M, SIGG-S-C, SIGG-S-K When setting initial data (upon installation, for example), the gain of the SALT reference signal for each color is 255. When setting initial data (upon installation, for example), the average value after sampling of the following values is 512 or higher: SGNL-S-Y, SGNL-S-M, SGNL-S-C; or, the value of SGNL-S-K is 144 or lower. When setting initial data (upon installation, for example), the average value after sampling of the following values is 338 or less: REF-S-Y, REF-S-M, REF-S-C; or, the value of REF-S-K is 484 or lower. When setting initial data (upon installation, for example), the average value after sampling of the following values is 0: SIGG-S-Y, SIGG-S-M, SIGG-S-C, SIGG-S-K. When setting initial data (upon installation, for example), the average gain after sampling of the SALT reference signal for each color is 0.
. i
xx40
xx41
xx42
E020
xx43
xx45
xx48
xx47
xx48
3-334
CANON CLCloOO RW.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPAIME AU JAPON)
3. OPERATIONS AND TlMlNG
Code
Cause Back-up data (DC controller PCB; error) Be sure to execute RAM clear, and enter the value recorded on the service label. (Or, initial settings may be missing.) xx4A
Description During copying sequence, the average value after sampling of the following values is 848 or higher: SGNL-S-Y, SGNL-S-C is 848 or higher; or, the value of SGNL-S-K is 445 or higher. During copying sequence, the average value after sampling of the following values is 848 or higher; or the value of FIEF-S-K is 544 or higher.
xx4B
xx4C. During copying sequence, the average value after sampling of the following values is 512 or lower: SGNL-S-Y, SGNL-S-M, SGNL-S-C; or, the value of SGNL-S-K is 102 or lower. xx4D During copying sequence, the average value after sampling of the following values is 336 or lower: REF-S-Y, FIEF-S-M, REF-S-C; or, the value of REF-S-K is 464 or lower. The value of SGNL-S-Y/M/C/K, which has been obtained by averaging samplings during copying sequence is 1008 or more. When setting initial data (upon installation, for example), the gain cannot be set (i.e., no change is noted in the value of SGNL between GAIN: 20H and GAIN: EO). An appropriate patch cannot be obtained when setting initial data (e.g., at time of installation). During multiple initial rotation (at power-on, for example), the window cleaning correction value is 60% or lower. During multiple initial rotation (at power-on, for example), the window cleaning correction value is 140% or lower.
E020
l
SALT sensor (fault)
xx4F
l l
SALT sensor (faulty) Stirring (developer inside developing assembly; faulty) Stray light (to sensor; no cover, front door open) Photosensitive drum (deterioration)
xx50
0455
SALT sensor (dirt on window, damage) Photosensitive drum (dirt; cleaning failure)
xx60
xx70
3-335
Code
Cause Back-up data (DC controller PCB; error) Be sure to execute RAM clear, and enter the value recorded on the service label. (Or, initial settings may be missing.) xx80
Description During copying sequence, the initial setting for the following is 848 or higher because of an error in the memory back-up data: SGNL-S-Y, SGNL-S-M, SGNL-S-C; or, the value of SGNL-S-K is 352 or higher. During copying sequence, the initial setting for the following is 848 or higher because of an error in the memory back-up data: FIEF-S-Y, REF-S-M, REF-S-C; or, the value of REF-S-K is 544 or higher. During copying sequence, the value of the following is 255 because of an error in the memory back-up data: SIGG-S-Y, SIGG-S-M, SIGG-S-C, SIGG-S-K During copying sequence, the initial setting for the following is 512 or lower because of an error in the memory back-up data: SGNL-S-Y, SGNL-S-M, SGNL-S-C; F& value of SGNL-S-K is 144 or lower. xx86 During copying sequence, the initial setting of the following is 336 or lower because of an error in the memory back-up data: REF-S-Y, FIEF-S-M, REF-S-C; or the value of REF-S-K is 464 or lower. During copying sequence, the value of the following is 0 because of an error in the memory back-up data: SIGG-S-Y, SIGG-S-M, SIGG-S-C, SIGG-S-K. During copying sequence, the data on the light (in the absence of toner) reflected by each photosensitive drum is 16 or lower because of an error in the memory back-up data. During copying sequence, the data for window soiling correction is 16 or lower because of an error in the memory backup data. The value of ;REF-S-Y/M/C/K which has been obtained by averaging samplings setting initial data is 16 or less. During copying sequence, the gain of the SALT reference signal for each color is NOT 128 because of an error in the memory back-up data.
xx81
xx82
xx85
E020
xx87
xx88
xx89
xx8A
xx8F
3-336
Code
l
Cause SALT sensor shutter (fault) xx90
Description Extreme changes have occurred ln the window soiling correction value 10 times or more. An error has occurred in the data 10 times or more as a result of window soiling correction. During copying sequence, the variation in 5 samplings of the following values is 47 or higher: SGNL-Y, SGNL-MN, SGNL-C
xx91
l l
l l
Developer (deterioration) Developing cylinder (rotation failure) Developing assembly (locking failure) Toner density sensor (faulty) Developer (inside developing assembly; stirring failure) Toner level sensor (faulty)
xxAA
xxAB . During copying sequence, the variation in 5 samplings of the following values is 47 or higher: FIEF-Y, REF-M, FIEF-C xxB0 When setting initial data, the average after sampling of the following values is 859 or higher: SGNL-Y, SGNL-M, SGNL-C When setting initial data, the average after sampling of the following values is 859 or higher: REF-Y, REF-M, REF-C When setting initial data, the average after sampling of the following values is 255. SIGG-Y, SIGG-M, SIGG-C When setting initial data, the average after sampling of the following values is 777 or lower: SGNL-Y, SGNL-M, SGNL-C When setting initial data, the average of the following values after sampllng is 205 or lower: REF-Y, REF-M, REF-C When setting initial data, the average of the following values after sampling is 0: SIGG-Y, SIGG-M, SIGG-C During copying sequence, the average of the following values after sampling is 1013 or higher: SGNL-Y, SGNL-M, SGNL-C
xxB1
E020
xxB2
xxB5
xxB6
xxB7
xxBA
COPYRlQHTO1~97CANONINC.
CANONCLCIOOO REV.1 MAY1997 PRlNTEOINJAPAN(IMPRIME AU
JAPON)
3437
- 3. OPERATIONS AND TlMlNG
Code
l
Cause Developing assembly (deterioration) l Developing cylinder (rotation failure) l Developing assembly (locking failure) * Toner density sensor (faulty) . Developer (inside developing assembly; stirring fault) l Toner level sensor (faulty) XXBB
Description During copying sequence, the value of the following is 30% or more higher than the initial setting: REF-Y, FIEF-M, REF-C During copying sequence, the average of the following values after sampling is 306 or higher: SGNL-Y, SGNL-M, SGNL-C During copying sequence, the value of the following is 30% or more lower than the initial setting: FIEF-Y, REF-M, REF-C When setting initial data, the values of the following cannot be set: SIGG-Y, SIGG-M, SIGG-C The Y/M/C hopper error sensor has detected the absence of toner. The Bk hopper error sensor has detected the absence of toner 10 times or more continuously. The value of the toner supply time correction data based on SGNLY/M/C is 141 or more for 20 copies or more during copying sequence. The value of the toner supply time correction data based on SGNLY/M/C is -188 or less for 20 copies or more during copying sequence.
XXBC
xxBD
E020
l l
xxBF
Toner sensor (faulty) Toner stirring screw (faulty)
xxF1 04F2
l l
l l
Developer (deterioration) Developing cylinder (rotation failure) Toner density sensor (faulty) Developer (inside developing assembly; stirring fault) Toner level sensor (faulty)
xxD0
xxE0
3-338
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTEO IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPONI
Code
l
Cause Developing motor (faulty) * DC controller PCB (faulty) l Developing cylinder (rotation failure) 0101
Description The rotation speed of the Y developing motor (M18Y) has deviated from a specific value for 0.1 set or more (PLL signal 0). The rotation speed of the M developing assembly (M18M) has deviated from a specific value for 0.1 set or more (PLL signal 0). The rotation speed of the C developing motor (M18C) has deviated from a specific value for 0.1 set or more a (PLL signal 0). The rotation speed of the Bk developing motor (Ml 8Bk) has deviated from a specific speed for 0.1 set or more (PLL signal 0).
0201
E023
0301
0401
l l
Counter (open circuit) DC controller PCB (faulty)
E030 E032
Data communication (error between Copy Data Controller-Al and copier)
Check immediately before the counter turns ON and OFF. (Normal if the counter drive signal is 0 when the counter turns ON; normal if the counter drive signal is 1 when the counter turns OFF.) After the copier has generated the copy start signal, count pulses have not been detected by the data Controller-Al within a specific period of time.
COPYRlQHTQ~1997CANONINC.
CANONCLClOOO REV.1 MAY1997 PRlNTEOINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAU
JAPON)
Code
l l
Cause Multifeeder motor (Ml ; faulty) DC controller PC8 (faulty)

0101
l
Description The upper lifter sensor (PS2) does not turn ON within 6 set after the multifeeder lifter motor (Ml) has turned ON. The lower lifter sensor (PS3) does not turn ON within 6 set after the multifeeder lifter motor (Ml) has turned ON. The paper deck lifter upper limit switch (SW8001) does not turn on within 40 set after the paper deck motor (M8001) has turned ON. The paper deck lifter lower switch (SW8002) does not turn on within 40 set after the paper deck motor (M8001) has turned ON. The duplexing unit stacking guide home position sensor (PS29) does not turn ON within 4 set after the duplexing unit stacking guide motor (M23) has turned ON. The duplexing unit stacking guide home position sensor (PS29) remains ON for 1 set or more after the duplexing unit stacking guide motor (M23) has turned ON.
E040
Paper deck motor (M8001; faulty) Paper deck lifter upper switch (SW8001; faulty) Paper deck lifter lower limit switch (SW8002; faulty) DC controller PCB (faulty)
0102
l l
0001
E041
0002
Duplexing unit stacking guide motor (M23; faulty) Duplexing unit stacking guide home position sensor (PS29; DC controller PC6 (faulty)
0001
EOSO
fauty)
0002
3-340
Code
Cause
Description Potential Control Fault high-order 2 digits xx=OO: common error xx=01 : Y xx=O2: M xX=03: c xx=O4: Bk
l l
Potential measurement unit (faulty) DC controller PCB (faulty) Pre-exposure lamp (fault)
xx01
The difference between VDl nneasured during the 1st rotation a nd VDl measured during the 2nd rotai tion is 30 V or more.
xx02 * The difference between VD2 n neasured during the 1st rotation a nd VD2 measured during the 2nd rotai tion is 30 V or more. xx03 The diffeience between VLl rr ieasured during the 1st rotation a nd VLl measured during the 2nd rota! tion is 30 V or more. The difference between VL2 ITieasured during the 1st rotation a nd VL2 measured during the 2nd rotai tion is 30 V or more. The measurement of VDl is 5 OOVor higher and, in addition, the rnE tasurement of VD2 is 900 V or highemr. The measurement of VDl is 9 00 V or higher and, in addition, the rnc ,asure. ment of VD2 is 900 V or higheII. The measurement of VDl is 2 OOVor lower and, in addition, the mei asurement of VD2 is 600 V or lower The measurement of VDl is 1 50Vor lower and, in addition, the merssurement of VD2 is 300 V or lower The measurement of VDl is 1 50 V or lower and, in addition, the met ssurement of VD2 is 150 v or lower. The measurement of VDl, WI 12, VLl, or VL2 is 10 V or lower.
xx04
E061
. Primary/Pre-primary charging assembly (faulty) l HVDC (faulty) l Pre-exposure lamp (faulty)
l
xx10
Primary charging assembly (faulty) HVDC (faulty) Video controller PCB (faulty) Laser unit (faulty)
xx11
l l
xx12
xx13
Primary charging assembly (faulty) HVDC (faulty) Potential measurement unit (faulty) DC controller PCB (faulty)
xx14
xx15
3-341
Code
l l l
Cause Video controller PCB (faulty) Laser unit (faulty) Scanner (faulty) xx16
Description The difference between VD1 and VL1 measurements is 20 V or less and, in addition, the measurement of VDl is 200 V or more. The difference between VD2 and VL2 measurements is 200 V or less and, in addition, the VD2 measurement is 600 V or higher.
l l
Video controller PCB (faulty) Laser intensity (poor adjustment) * Laser unit (faulty)
xx17
The VLl measurement is 200 V or higher and, in addition, the VL2 measurement is 400 V or higher.
2
E06 1
Laser unit (faulty) Laser shutter (faulty) l Photosensitive drum (faulty) l Scanner (faulty) l Video controller PCB (faulty) l Laser intensity (adjustment faulty)
l l
xx20 xx21
The computation value of VOO is the upper limit value (800 V) or higher. The computation value (750 V) of Vdc is the upper limit value (750 V) or higher. The computation value of Vg is the upper limit value (950 V) or higher. The computation value of VOO is the upper limit value (950 V) or higher. The computation value of Vdc is the lower limit value (200 V) or lower. The computation value of VOO is the lower limit value (325 V) or lower. The computation value of Vg is the lower limit value (250 V) or lower. The computation value of VFF is the lower limit value (700 V) or lower. The computation value of VFF is the lower limit value (0 V) or lower.
xx22 xx23 Potential measurement unit (faulty) HVDC (faulty) Laser unit (faulty) Video controller PCB (faulty) Laser intensity (adjustment fault) xx24 xx25 xx26 xx27 xx28
l l l l
3-342
COPYRIOHTQ
1997 CANON INC.
CANONCLMOOO REV.1 MAY1897 PRlNTEOINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAU
JMN)
Code
l
Cause Video controller PCB (faulty) Laser unit (faulty) . Laser intensity (adjustment fault) l Photosensitive drum (faulty) . Scanner (faulty) l Potential measurement unit (faulty) l HVDC (faulty)
l
Description xx30 xx31 xx32 xx33 xx34 xx35 xx36 The measurement of VDl is 400 V or higher. The measurement of VDl is 200 V or lower. The measurement of VD2 is 800 V or higher. The measurement of VD2 is 500 V or lower. The measurement of VLl is 200 V or
1 higher.
The measurement of VL2 is 400 V or more. The measurement of VL2 is 0 V or lower. The difference between the computation value of Vdc measured previously and the computation value of Vdc measured currently is 30 V or more. The difference between the computation value of Vg measured previously and the computation value of Vg measured currently is 30 V or more. The computation value of VOO is the upper limit value (325 v) or higher. The computation value of VOO is the lower limit value (325 V) or lower.
E061 9 Potential measurement unit

l
xx50
(faulty) DC controller PCB (faulty)
xx51
. Potential measurement unit (faulty) l HVDC (faulty) l Video controller PCB (faulty) l Laser unit (faulty) l Laser shutter (faulty) l Scanner (faulty) l Environment sensor (faulty) l Photosensitive drum (faulty) l Photosensitive drum (poor grounding)
xx52 xx53
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY lQ97 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-343
Code
Cause
Description
i
Drum Temperature Control Fault xX=00: common error xx=01 : Y xx=O2: M xX=03: c xx=O4: Bk
,/
E062
l l
DC controller PCB (faulty) AC driver (faulty)
xx01
The drum temperature is 57C or more for 0.5 set or more. The drum temperature has dropped below 15C or less after it has reached a specific temperature;
1
xx02
Drum thermistor (faulty) DC controller PCB (faulty) Transfer belt home position sensor (faulty)
0010 0001
The drum thermistor has an open circuit or a short circuit. The transfer belt home position cannot be detected within a specific period of time (20 set). The transfer belt home position is detected longer than a specific period of time (2 set).
l l
E070 E072 /
l l
0002
Belt cleaner drive motor DC controller Transfer drawer connector (fault) DC controller PCB (fault) Transfer belt end sensor (fault)
The sensor output does not change after a specific period of time (6 set). 0001 The connect signal CONNECT of the transfer assembly frame goes 0 when the front door is closed. The transfer belt end sensor 4 (PS20) and the transfer belt end sensor 1 (PS17) detected the belt at the same time. The transfer belt end sensor 3 (PS19) and the transfer belt end sensor 2 (PS18) detected the belt at the same time. The transfer belt end sensor 3 (PS19) and the transfer belt end sensor 4 (PS20) detected the belt at the same time. The transfer belt end sensor 1 (PS17) and the transfer belt end sensor 2 (PS18) detected the belt at the same time.
l l
0002
E073
0003
0004
0005
3-344
COPYRIQHT Q lQg7 CANON INC.
CANON CCC1000 REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIYE AU JAPON)
Code
l
Cause Transfer belt lifter sensor 1 (PS12), 2 (PS13) Pick-up motor (MlO; faulty) Transfer belt lifter clutch (CL17; faulty) DC controller PCB (faulty)
Description The transfer belt lifter sensor 1 (PS12) or 2 (PS13) does not go 1 (ON) within a specific period of time after the transfer belt lifter clutch (CL17) has turned ON.
E074
l l
E075
Transfer belt end sensor 1 (PS17; fault) l Transfer belt end sensor 2 (PS18; fault) l Transfer belt end sensor 1 (PS19; fault) . Transfer belt end sensor 2 (PS20; fault) l Transfer belt swing motor (M13; fault) l DC controller PCB (fault)
0001
The transfer belt end sensor 1 (PS17) does not turn off 200 set after it has detected the belt. The transfer belt end sensor 2 (PS18) does not turn off 206 set after it has d detected the belt. The transfer belt end sensor 3 (PS19) detected the transfer belt. The transfer belt end sensor 4 (PS20) detected the transfer belt.
0002
0003 0004
Transfer belt cleaning web (taken
E 0 7 6 *. Web ) length sensor (faulty) DC controller PCB (faulty) El00

Laser unit (faulty) . Laser driver PCB (faulty) . Image processor PCB (faulty)
l
A load is imposed on the web motor (M12) because of a shortage of web, causing the web rotation sensor (PSlO) to detect a rotation fault. xx01 At the start of potential control, the BD signal is not detected for 1 set or more. The operation ON current used to obtain optimum intensity is larger than a specific value.
xx02
l Laser scanner drive system El 10 ( o v e r l o a d ) l Laser scanner motor (M4; faulty) l DC controller PCB (faulty)
The rotation speed of the motor has deviated from a specific value for 0.1 set or more.
COPYfUOHTQ1997CANONINC.
CANONCLCiOOOREV.1MAY1997 PRlNTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
344s
Code
l
Cause CCD unit for pattern reading (faulty) l PCB for pattern reading (faulty) l DC controller PCB (faulty) In addition, a fault in the primary charging assembly or the transfer belt may have prevented the formation of a pattern. xx01 xx02
Description The center of a pattern cannot be determined. The center position (difference) in relation to the M pattern is 61 or more in main scanning direction. The center position (difference) in relation to the M pattern is 113 or more forY and Bk and 141 or more for C in sub scanning direction. After the shutter motor has started to rotate, the shutter open sensor does not turn on after a specific period of time. After the shutter motor has started to rotate, the shutter closed sensor does not turn on after a specific period of time. When the main switch is turned ON, 5V is not present on the DC controller PCB. When the main switch is turned on with the front door closed, 24 V is not present on the DC controller PCB. The thermal switch has detected overheating of the 5V system on the DC power supply PCB. The thermal switch has detected overheating in the 24VR system on the DC power supply PCB. The thermal switch has detected overheating in the 24VU system on the DC power supply PCB. The DC power supply cooling fan is not rotating normally.
xx03
El94
0001
0002
l l
DC power supply PCB unit (faulty) DC controller PCB (faulty) DC power supply cooling fan (faulty)
0001
0002
0003
E260
0004
0005
0006 Bar code label (faulty or absent) Image processor PCB (faulty) EC0 PCB (faulty) Image processor PCB (faulty) EC0 PCB (faulty) Connection (between image processor and EC0 CPB) Bar code label (faulty or absent)
E350 E351 E352

3-346
l l
During the first copying operation after the power switch has been turned ON, the presence of a bar code label is not confirmed during a check on the standard white plate.
l
l l l
The EC0 PCB and the image processor PC are not connected. The combination of the ROMs on the EC0 PCB is wrong.
During the execution of ADUTO-ADJ in service mode, the bar code on the standard white plate cannot be read.
3. DPERATIONS AND TIMING m
RF The microprocessor on the RFs controller PCB is equipped with a mechanism to check the condition of the machine (sensors, in particular). Code Cause . Data communication with copier (faulv) Pick-up motor (Ml ; faulty) Pick-up roller home position sensor 1 (S8; faulty)
The mechanism runs a check as necessary and indicates on the copiers control panel the presence of an error upon detection.
Description
l
E400 E401
Communication with the copier is monitored at all times. The communication is disrupted for 5 set or more. The sensor state does not change even after the pick-up motor has been driven for more than 2 sec. The-number of belt motor clock pulses is less than a specific value for 100 ms. The number of slip clock pulses is below a specific value for 100 ms. The number of delivery motor clock pulses is below a specific value for 200 ms.
l l
Belt motor (M3; faulty) Belt motor clock sensor (Sl 1; E402 f a u l t y )
l l
E403 E404
l l
Reversing motor (M2; faulty) Slip sensor (Sl 0; faulty) Delivery motor (M5; faulty) Delivery motor clock sensor (S12; faulty)
l l
l Pick-up motor (Ml ; faulty) . Pick-up motor clock sensor (S12; E405 f a u l t y )
. The number of pick-up motor clock pulses is below a specific value for 200 ms. The sensor state does not change even the tray ascent motor is driven for 2 set or more.
E407 E408 E411
l l
Pick-up motor (M6; faulty) Tray position sensor (S25; faulty) Feeding motor (MB; faulty) Feeding motor clock sensor (S22; faulty) Registration sensor 1 (S3; faulty) Skew sensor 1 (S4; faulty) Manual feed registration sensor (S19; faulty) Image leading edge sensor (S20; faulty) Original sensor 1 (S7; faulty)
l l
. The number of feeding motor clock pulses is below a specific value for 100 ms. . The output of each sensor in the absence of paper is higher than a specific Vahe.
l l l
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1897 PRINTED IN JA6AN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3941
Sorter Code Cause

l
Description . There is no clock signal from the clock sensor (P15) of the feeding motor fopr 250 ms or more.
l
ES10 E516 ES17 ES22
There is no clock signal from the clock sensor (P15) of the feeding motor for 250 ms or more. Low-speed feeding motor (MlO; rotation failure) Locking cam (buffer path unit; home position not detected)
There is no clock signal from the clock sensor (P123) of the feeding motor for 250 ms or more. The home position is not detected within a specific time after the Copy Start key has been pressed. *Varies depending on copier.
Push bar motor (M7; rotation fail-
ure)
* The operation does not end within 2000 ms after the motor drive signal has been generated. * The operation does not end within 2000ms after the motor drive signal has been generated.
l
. Reference wall motor (M6; rota~523 tion failure)

l Multi guide motor (MS; rotation ~524 f a i l u r e )
The operation does not end within 2000 ms after the motor drive signal has been generated.
ES25 ES26 E530,
Bin paper sensor 1 (53, S4; auto adjustment fault) Bin paper sensor 2 (S6, S7; auto adjustment)
. Auto adjustment of the bin paper sensor 1 (S3, S4) cannot be executed; or, an error has occurred in the auto adjustment value.
l
Auto adjustment of the bin paper sensor (S6, S7) cannot be executed; or, an error has occurred in the auto adjustment value. The operation does not end within a specific time after the motor drive signal has been generated: 5000 ms if front retrieval, and 2000 ms otherwise. The operation does not end within 2000 ms after the motor drive signal has been generated. There is no clock signal from the clock sensor (Pl8) of the motor for 250 ms or more. The input signal from the shifting home position sensor (P19) for 1000 ms or more.
l Guide bar motor (M8 rotation failure)
Stapler unit drive motor (M4; rotation failure)
ES31
l Stapler unit shift motor (M3; rota~532 tion failure)
* The operation does not end within 5000 ms after the motor drive signal has been generated.
3-348
COPYFUOHT (0 1997 CANON INC.
CANON CLCI 990 REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Code
Cause
l
Description . Auto adjustment of the stapler paper sensor cannot be executed; or, an error has occurred in the auto adjustment value. * The operation does not end within a specific period of time after the motor drive signal has been generated: 20000 ms during initialization, and 2000 ms otherwise. l There is no clock signal from the clock plate sensor of the motor for 250 ms or more. l The input signal from the lead cam position sensor (P120) does not change for 2000 ms or more.
E533
Stapler paper sensor auto adjustment (faulty) Bin shift motor (M9; rotation failure)
ES40 ES0
l DC output (from sorter controller; faulty)
An error has occurred in the DC output (24 VL, 24 VP) from the sorter controller PCB.
3-349
Code
Cause
Description The communication between the IP-ED PCB and the IP-MAIN PCB is interrupted for 5 set or more. See the Service Manual for the film projector.
E620 P-ED pcB E634 E700 ES00 ES04

Film projector lamp (faulty)
DC controller PCB (faulty) Reader unit controller PCB (faulty) Power supply PCB (faulty) Power switch DC controller PCB DC harness Power supply unit (DCPl) cooling fan (error)
The communication betweenthe DC controller PCB and the reader unit controller PCB is disrupted for 5 set or more. An interruption in the auto shut-off signal is detected foil set or more. The rotation of the cooling fan for the power supply unit (DCPl) has stopped.
3-350
Clearing EOOO 1) Start service mode, and select FUSER under FUNC. 2) Press EOOO-RLS. 3) Turn off and then on the power switch. Clearing E005 1) Start service mode, and select FUSER under FUNC. 2) Press E005RLS. 3) Turn off and then on the power switch.
l l
Clearing E004 1) Turn off the power switch. 2) Disconnect and connect tlie power plug from and to to the power outlet. 3) Turn on the power switch.
l
Clearing E075 1) Start service mode, and select F-MISCp under FUNC. 2) Press E075-RLS. 3) Turn off and then on the power switch.
COPYRKMT (0 1997 CANON INC.
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY lQQ7 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-351
I. EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS

A. Covers
1. External Covers and Copyboard Glass
q$ &
Figure 4-101 A
Flgure 4-102A
COPYRlQHTQ1~~7CANONINC.
CANON CLClOOOREV.lMAY1997 PfUNTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
Left cover (2) Vertical size plate (2) Glass retainer right (2) Reader unit left cover (4) Reader unit front cover (2) Reader unit rear cover (4) Upper rear left cover (2) Digital unit cover 1 (2) Digital unit cover 2 (2) Digital unit cover 3 (2) Digital unit cover 4 (4) Upper rear right cover (2) Front right cover (2) Rear right cover (2) Rear cover 1 (4) Rear cover 2 (4) Rear cover 3 (2) Copyboard glass a Hopper upper cover Right door Left door IPU cover Cassette right cover Cassette lower cover Paper deck front cover Paper deck rear cover Paper deck door Paper deck upper cover Multifeeder cover 1 Multifeeder cover 2 Copy tray
2. Internal Covers
Figure 4-103A Hopper left cover (1) Counter cover (2) Hopper right cover (1) Hopper lower front cover (4) Transfer assembly right cover (2) Transfer assembly front cover (2) Duplexing unit front cover (4) Fixing assembly front cover (2) @I Hopper top cover (5)
4-2
B. Control Panel
1. Removing the Control Panel 1) Remove the left cover. 2) Remove the three screws 0.
4) Remove the two hopper fixing screws 0.
Figure 4-1038 Figure 4-101 B 3) Remove the hopper left and right covers 0. 5) Slide out the hopper assembly @ to the front.
Flgure 4-1048 Figure 4-1028 6) Lift the control panel, and disconnect the connector: then, remove the control panel.
COPYRlQHT@l997CANONINC.
CANON CLClOOO REV.lMAY1997 PRlNTEOINJAPAN(IMPAIME AUJAPON)
- 4. MECHANICAL SYSTEM
C. Fans
1. Outline 2. Removing the Laser Cooling Fan (FM4/5)
.
I
3. Removing the Air Filters (laser cooling fan FM4/5)

1) 2)
Remove the multifeeder cover l/2. Remove the air filters 0.
Removing the Air Filters 1) Remove the left cover. 2) Remove the ozone filter and the air filter. 3) Remove the four screws 0, and remove the fan unit 0.
Figure 4-l 02C

.
1) 2)
I I
I /
Removing the Laser Cooling Fan Shift up the digital unit. Remove the three screws @ each: and remove the fans 0.
Figure 4-101 C 4) Remove the four screws each, and remove the fans from the fan unit.
1 0 Figure 4-103C
1 0
COPYRIUHT Q 1997 CANON INC.
4. Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM1 7/l 8)

.
1)
Removing the Filter Remove the the two screws 0, and remove the filter cover 0.
1) 2)
Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM17118) Remove the rear cover l/2. Disconnect the three connectors 0, and remove the four screws 0; then, remove the fan mount 0.
Figure 4-104C Figure 4-108C
2) Remove the the two screws 0, and remove

the filter cover 0.
3) Remove the four screws 0, and remove the power supply cooling fan 0.
Figure 4-107C
Flgure 4-10X
COPYRlQHTO1~97CANONINC.
CANON CLClOOO
REV.1 MAYlM7 PRlNTEOINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)
5. Removing the Primary Exhaust
Fan (FM6)
.
1)
Removing the Filter Remove the two screws @I, and remove the filter cover @ of the rear cover 1.
Removing the Primary Exhaust Fan 1) Remove the rear cover 1, 2) Remove the screw 0, and open the DC controller PCB. 3) Disconnect the connector 0, and remove the two screws 0; then, draw out the fan assembly 0.
Figure 4-108C 2) Remove the ozone filter 0.
0
1
Figure 4-11 OC 4) Remove the three screws 0, and remove the fan 0.
Q
3
Figure 4-l 0%
u
Flgure 4-111 C
CANON CLCIOOO REV.1 MAY lQQ7 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPDN)
4. MECHANICAL SYSTEM
6. Primary Suction Fan (FM8/9) . Removing the Filter 1) Remove the screw @ (one each), and remove
the filter covers from the rear cover 0.
7. . . Removing the Scanner Suction
Fan (FM12/13)
1)
2)
Shift up the digital unit. Remove the two screws 0, and shift the analog processor PCB 0.
Figure 4-112C
2) .
1) 2)
Remove the filters. Removing the Primary Suction Fan Remove the rear cover 2. Disconnect the connectors @ (one each), and remove the four screws @ each; then, remove the fan 0.
n
Figure 4-114C 3) Remove the three mounting screws a>, and disconnect the two connectors 0; then, remove the fan guard plate 0.
1 0 Figure 4-113C
Flgure 4-115C
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY lQ97 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4 - 7
4) Remove the two screws @ each, and remove
the fans 0.
4) Disconnect the connectors @I (one each), and remove the two screws @I each; then, remove the fan 0.
Figure 4-116C
Figure 4-118C
a. Removing the Scanner Cooling

Fan (FM1 O/l 1) 1) Remove the copyboard glass. 2) Remove the scanner left cover.
3) Remove the seven screws 0, and remove the left stay 0.
9. Removing the Digital Unit Cooling
Fan (FM14/15/16)
.
Removing the Filter
1)
2)
Remove the two screws, and remove the multifeeder cover 1. Remove the filters 0.
Figure 4-l 19C
Figure 4-117C
CANON GLC1000 REV.1 MAY 1897 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Removing the Digital Unit Cooling Fan (FMW15) 1) Shift up the digital unit. 2) Disconnect the connector @ (one each), and remove the four screws @ each; then, remove the fan @ together with the fan mount 0.
10. Removing the Pre-Fixing Feeding Fan (FM7) 1) Remove the two screws, and remove the
counter cover. 2) Remove the pre-fixing feeding assembly. 3) Remove the four screws 0, and remove the fan 0.
2 0 Figure 4-120C
.
1) 2)
Removing the Digital Unit Cooling Fan (FM16) Shift up the digital unit. Disconnect the connector 0, and remove the two screws 0; then, remove the fan 0.
I Figure 4-122C
Ih
11. Removing the Delivery Assembly Lower Fan

1) Remove the left cover. 2) Disconnect the connector 0, and remove the four screws 8; then, remove the fan stay 0.
Figure 4-121C Flgure 4-123C 3) Disconnect the connector (one each), and remove the four screws each; then, remove the fan.
COPYtUOHT81997 CANONINC.
II. DRIVE SYSTEM

A. Drum Drive System
1. Removing the Drum Drive Assembly Remove the rear cover 2. 1) 2) Remove the two screws @ each, and remove
the two fly wheels 0.
5) Remove the two screws @ each, and loosen the tensioner plate @ (four points); then, detach the four belts from the drum drive assembly pulleys.
Q
5
6 0
R XR
Figure 4-203A 6) Disconnect the two connectors 0, and four
screws 8; then, remove the drum drive assembly @I.

Figure 4-201A
3) Slide out the process unit. 4) Remove the two screws @ each, and remove the drum heater terminal cover 0.
5?
Flgure 4-204A
Figure 4-202A
4-10
CANON CLCl 990 REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4. MECHAN~CALSYSTEM
2. Removing the Drum Motor
Assembly
1) Remove the two screws each, and remove the
two fly wheels.
B. Developing Motor Assembly

1. Removing the Developing Motor Assembly Remove the rear cover 1 and the rear cover 2. 1) Remove the two screws, and remove the fly 2)
wheel (left). (This applies only when removing the M developing motor assembly.) 3) Remove the two screws @ each, and disconnect the two connectors @ each; then, remove the developing motor assembly 0.
2) Disconnect the two connectors 0, and

remove the four screws 0; then, remove the drum motor assembly 0.
0
1
Figure,4-205A
3. Points to Note When Installing the Drum Drive Belt

Install the drum drive belt @ so that the markings @ on the drum drive pulleys are all in the same direction.
2 0 Figure 4-201 B (Y, M developing motor assemblies)
Q
3
P
1
Flgure 4-206A 2 0 Flgure 4-2028 (C, Bk developing motor arsembllas)
CANONCLCIOOO
REV.1MAY1B97PRlNTEOINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAU JAPON)
4-11
2. Removing the Developing Motor 1) Remove the rear cover 1 and the rear cover 2. 2) Remove the two screws, and remove the fly
wheel (left). (This applies only when removing the M developing motor.) 3) Remove the four screws each 0, and disconnect the two connectors each 0; then, remove the developing motor 0.
C. Pick-Up Drive Assembly

1. Outline
See Figure 4-201C for how the pick-up drive belt is routed.
Figure 4-201 C Figure 4-2036
4-12
2. Removing the Pick-Up Drive Assembly

1) Remove the rear cover l/2 and the rear right cover. 2) Disconnect the four connectors 0, and remove the three screws 0; then, remove the pick-up motor driver PCB @ together with the support plate.
3) Loosen the two screws @I to loosen the ten-
sioner plate 0; then, detach the drive belt 0.
Figure 4-203C
4) Remove the pick-up assembly. 5) Remove the screw @ from the pick-up relay PCB, and remove the two screws @ from the pick-up drive assembly.
Figure 4-202C
Figure 4-204C
COPYRlQHTQ1997
CANON INC.
CANON CLClOOOREV.lMAY1997
PRINTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAWN)
4-13
6) Remove the five screws 0, and disconnect
3. Removing the Pick-Up Motor

1) Remove the pick-up drive assembly. 2) Loosen the three screws 0, and shift the tension roller 0; then, detach the timing belt @ from the pulley 0. Remove the four screws 0, grip ring 0, and pulley 0; then, remove the pick-up motor.
the connector @; then, remove the pick-up drive assembly 0.
P
6 Figure 4-205C
yyiA
a@
60
Figure 4-206C
4-14
COPYRIQHT Q lSS7 CANON INC.
D. Scanner Drive Assembly

1. Removing the Scanner Drive Assembly/Scanner Motor 1) Remove the upper rear left cover and the 2)
reader unit rear cover. Disconnect the connector 0, and remove the Four screws 0; then, remove the scanner motor @I together with the mounting plate.
4) Remove the two screws @>, and remove the O-ring @ from the scanner motor.
Figure 4-203D
Figure.6201 D 3) Remove the two screws 0, and remove the scanner motor assembly 0.
2. Adjusting the Belt Tension When Installing the Scanner Motor 1) When tightening the screw, be sure that the
belt is free of slack (i.e., move the motor to the right).
3. Routing the Scanner Cable . Keep the mirror positioning tool (FYO3002-000) near at hand when routlng the scanner cable. 1) Remove the left cover and the hopper left cover. 2) Remove the control panel. 3) Remove the vertical size plate and the glass retainer right; then, remove the copyboard glass.
Figure 4-202D
COPYAlQHT Q 1097 CANON INC.
4-15
4) Move
the No. 2 mirror mount so that the pulley shaft 0 of the No. 2 mirror mount is visible through the long hole @ in the side plate.
5) Fit the binding screw @ (M4x8) to the pulley shaft @ so that the pulley may be temporarily fixed to the side plates @ found at the front and the rear of the pulley, thereby temporarily fixing the No. 2 mirror mount in place.
Figure 4-204D (rear)

)I 1 dn1
Figure 4-206D
Figure 4-205D (front) 6) Route the scanner cable on the pulleys and hooks as indicated in Figure 4-207R
ball
-Wind 8 times. I@) mporarily.
Figure 4-207D
4-16
4. MECHANICAL SYSTEM -
7) Remove the screw @ used in step 5).
8)
Loosen the screw on the mirror positioning tool (FY9-3002-000), and extend the arm @ fully.
Figure 4-21 OD Figure 4-208D 9) Install the mirror positioning tool 0 between the No. 1 mirror mount and the No. 2 mirror mount; and insert the pin @ that comes with the mirror positioning tool. 10) Install the metal fixing @J of the scanner cable to the No. 1 mirror mount using the hole in the side plate with two screws @I.
Figure 4-211 D
Flgure 4-209D
Figure 4-212D
4-17
11) Remove the mirror positioning tool.
E. Fixing Drive Assembly

Removing the Fixing Drive Assembly/Fixing Motor
Remove the rear cover 1.
2) Remove the screw, and open the DC controller PCB. 3) Remove the two screws 0, and disconnect the four connectors 0; then, remove the fixing motor driver 0.
1 0
Figure 4-201 E
4) Remove the five screws 0, and remove the fixing drive assembly 0.
Figure 4-202E
4-18
5) Remove the four screws 0, grip ring 0, and
gear 0; then, remove the fixing motor @.
F. Waste Toner Feeding Drive Assembly

1. Removing the Waste Toner Feeding Drive Assembly/Waste Toner Motor Disconnect the twp connectors 0, and 1)
remove the four screws 0; then, remove the waste toner motor 0. ,
Figure 4-203E
2 0
Figure 4-201 F
2) Disconnect the connector 0, and remove the four screws 0; then, slide out the waste toner feeding assembly @to the front while shifting it to the right.
Figure 4-2021:
4-19
2. Removing the Waste Toner Feeding Pipe/Screw Remove the waste toner cover, and take out 1)
the waste toner box from the machine. 2) Remove the waste toner motor and the waste toner feeding drive assembly. 3) Remove the five screws @I, and free the top plate @ of the power supply assembly.
5) Detach the Bk developing assembly drive belt 0.
Figure 4-205F
6)
Remove the two fastons @ of the micro switch, and remove the three screws 0, then, pull out the waste toner feeding screw drive assembly 8 and the waste toner pipe @I toward the right front. -
Figure 4-203F 4) Remove the two screws 0, and pull out the waste toner feeding vertical pipe @ by shifting it to the bottom.
Figure 4-206F
Figure 4-204F
4-20
CANON ClCl990 REV.1 MAY 1997 PRIN7El.I IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
III. PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

A. Paper Deck
1. Removing the Paper Deck 1) Disconnect the connector of the paper deck
from the copier.
2) Slide out the paper deck.

3) Remove the fixing screws @ from the rail (front, rear) of the paper deck. Figure 4-303A 2) Remove the four mounting screws 0, and remove the paper deck top cover 0. GI
Figure 4-301 A
2. Removing the Cover 1) Remove the four mounting screws @ each,

and remove the paper deck front cover @ and the paper deck rear cover 0. Figure 4-304A
Figure 4-302A
CANON CM1000 REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTEO IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3. Removing the Pick-Up Roller

1) Remove the four screws 0, and disconnect the connector 0; then, remove the paper deck and the heater 0.
Orientation of the Pick-Up Roller The pick-up roller rotates in a specific direction. When installing the pick-up roller to the pick-up roller shaft, install it so that the marking 8 shown in Figure 4-307A is toward the rear of the machine.
Rear of machine
Figure 4-307A Figure 4-305A
Open the paper deck door, and remove the stop ring @I at the front and the stop ring @I at the rear; then, remove the pick-up roller 0.
4. Removing the Pick-Up/Feeding Roller Remove the four screws, and disconnect the 1)
connector; then, remove the paper deck heater. 2) Remove the pick-up roller from the front. 3) Pull out the push lock used to fix the side guide plate (left, right) in place to free the side guide plate. 4) Insert a screwdriver into the hole for the push lock, remove the screw 0, and remove the roller stopper plate 0.
Flgure 4-305A
Flgure 4-308A
4-22
7) Remove the stop ring @I. 8) While pushing down the separation roller assembly @, remove the timing belt 0, and remove the pick-up/feeding roller assembly @.
Figure 4-309A
5) Remove the stop ring @I and the bushing 0;

then, remove the pick-up roller shaft 8 toward the rear.
Figure 4-312A
n
Figure 4-31 OA
Orientation of the Pick-Up/Feeding Roller The pick-up/feeding roller rotates in a specific direction. When installing the pick-up/feeding roller, install it so that the marking shown in Figure 4313A is toward the rear of the machine. Bearing (one-way) Markings A Rear of 0 machine Figure 4-313A
6)
Remove the mounting screw 0, and remove the separation roller assembly cover 8.
Figure 4-311 A
4-23
5. Removing the Separation Roller

1) Open the paper deck cover, and remove the mounting screw 0; then, remove the separation roll assembly cover 0.
Figure 4-316A Figure 4-314A 2) Remove the mounting screw 0; while pushing down the separation roller pressure roll 0, remove the separation roller assembly @ together with the support plate. n Orientation of the Separation Roller The separation roller rotates in a specific direction. 1) When installing the separation rubber roller, make sure that the marking shown in Figure 4-317A is toward the coupling (rear of machine).
Figure 4-317A
2)
When installing the separation roller, make sure that the rib provided for identifying the direction on the roller collar is toward the front of the machine. E-ring Bearing Rib for identifying direction d
Figure 4-315A 3) Remove the stop ring @ and the bearing @ from the front of the separation roller assembly; then, pull out the separation roller shaft 8 from the separation roller assembly to remove the separation roller 0.
Front of machine Roller collar Figure 4-318A
4-24
CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY lQg7 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
n Adjusting the Pressure of the Paper Deck Separation/Feeding Roller If pick-up faults occur or double-feeding occurs frequently, change the position of the spring hooked on the retard stay.
@ If pick-up faults (failure) occur, increase the pressure. @ If double-feeding occurs, decrease the pressure.
~~~~~~,~~(*~oetothe~~hole results in a pressure change of about
50 9).
Spring Retard stay Figure 4-319A Increase the pressure.
4-2s
6. Positioning the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid Place one sheet of copy paper on the paper 1)
deck lifter, and turn on the power.
7. Adjusting the Paper Surface 1) Remove the paper deck upper cover.
2) Set paper on the paper deck, and cause the lifter to move up. 3) Place a ruler or the like on the paper, and check the position by butting the ruler against the separation plate on the pick-up side.
2) When the lifter has stopped to move up, turn

off the power switch, and open the paper deck cover. 3) Remove the paper deck cover (rear). 4) Install the solenoid so that the pick-up roller is up 4.0 *1 mm from the surface when the plunger of the pick-up roller releasing solenoid is pushed in. Mounting ptate Pick-up roller
Standard: Correct if the paper surface is within

the bottom two-thirds (shaded) with reference to the bend angle.
I/J\
Pick-up roller releasing solenoid \ Adjusting screw Figure 4320A
Surface of copy paper (Place one sheet on the paper deck.)
Figure 4-321 A 4) If the paper surface is not as indicated, loosen the adjusting screw on the paper sensor plate; then, move the paper sensor support plate up and down to adjust the position of the sensor. l If the paper surface is low, move up the paper sensor support plate. If the paper surface is high, move down the l paper sensor support plate. Screw
Figure 4-322A
4-26
COPYRlOHT Q 1997 CANON INC.
CANON CLClOOO RN.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
B. Pick-Up Assembly
I
12) End
service mode.
1. Removing the Pick-Up Assembly

Remove the five screws, and remove the paper deck. 2) Remove the front right cover and the rear cover. 3) Slide out the cassette l/2 and the duplexing unit. 4) Disconnect the two connectors 0, and remove the six screws 0; then, remove the pick-up assembly 0.
1)
2. Removing the Pick-Up Roller 1) Remove the pick-up assembly. 2) Remove the two E-rings @ (resin), and
remove the two pick-up rollers @ together with the collars.
Figure 4-3028
Figure 4-301 B Making Adjustments after Installing the Pick-Up Assembly/Pick-Up Motor Be sure to perform the following after installing the pick-up assembly or the pick-up motor: 1) Put A4 or LTR copy paper in the cassette l/2. 2) Turn on the power, and wait until warm-up ends. 3) Set the copy count to 1 on the control panel. 4) Start service mode, and select FUNK P-UPTMG. 5) Press PK-ADJ-U. (Pick-up starts from the cassette 1.) 6) Repeat the operation two more times. 7) Press D-SEND-U. (The measurement data will be written to the DC controller.) 8) Press PK-ADJ-C. (Pick-up starts from the cassette.) 9) Repeat the operation two more times. 10) Press D-SEND-C. (The measurement data will be written into the DC controller.) 11) Record the value of PUDTWL on the service label.
4-27
3. Removing the Feeding Roller 1) Remove the pick-up assembly.

2) Remove the screw 0, and remove the upper guide 0.
:_ _~,i
i ~
d
2
Figure 4-3048 3)
Remove the screw 0, and remove the pick-up roller arm bushing 0.
Flgure 49058
4-20
CANON CCC1099 RN.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4) Remove the E-ring @ (resin), and remove the pick-up roller 8 from the rear. 5) Remove the E-ring @ (resin).
Figure 4-3068 6) Pull out the feeding roller from the shaft @ together with the belt pick-up roller shaft @>.
4. Removing the Pick-Up Assembly Separation Roller Remove the pick-up assembly. 1) Remove the screw 0, and remove the lower 2)
guide 0.
Figure 4-3078
Figure 4-3098
4-29
3) Remove the two screws 0, and remove the separation roller unit 0.
5. Adjusting the Separation Roller Pressure Remove the pick-up assembly. ? 2) Remove the screw 0, and remove the lower
guide.
I
I -
Figure 4-3106 4) Remove the two E-rings @ (resin). 5) Pull out the separation roller shaft 8, and remove the separation roller 0. Figure 4-3128 3) If double-feeding or pick-up faults occur during pick-up operation, adjust the position of the pressure spring @ of the separation roller 0. l If double-feeding occurs, hook the spring on A. l If pick-up faults occur, hook the spring on B.
Figure 4-311 B
Figure 4-3138
440
4. MECHANICAL SYSTEM -
6. Positioning the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid (SL9, SLl 0)

Install the solenoid so that the pick-up roller arm @ butts against the upper stay @ when the plunger of the solenoid is pushed in.
8.
Left/Right Registration
1) Select ATTRACT under FUNC in service

mode. 2) Select the pick-up assembly using ATTSLCT. 3) Press ATT-ON. (Copy paper will be picked up automatically and remain attracted to the transfer belt.) At this time, make adjustments so that the distance L between the p,aper edge (front of copy paper) and the front plate of the transfer unit is 74.7 kO.5 mm. (If LTR, 83.7 kO.5 mm.) Slide out the duplexing unit (if cassette 1) or 4) the cassette 1 (if cassette 2). 5) Loosen the screw 0, and adjust the position of the cassette hook plate @ as indicated.
Figure 4-314B
7. Releasing the Lifter

If the lifter @ is up, push down the lifter releasing arm to lower it.
Flgure 4-3158
Flgure 4-3168
4-31
side plate
Figure 43178
9.
Removing the Duplexing Pick-Up Roller

Remove the pick-up assembly. Remove the E-ring @ (resin), and remove the pick-up roller @ together with the collar.
1) 2)
Figure 4318B
4-32
COPYRlQHT 8 1997 CANON INC.
CANON GLC1000 REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTEO IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
10. Removing the Duplexing Feeding Roller 1

1) Remove, the pick-up assembly. 2) Remove the screw 0, and remove the pick-up roller arm bushing 0. 3) Removing the E-ring @I (resin)
3 0
Figure 4-3208 4) Pull out the feeding roller together with the
11. Removing the Duplexing Feeding Roller 2

1) Remove the pick-up assembly, and open the pick-up assembly door. 2) Remove the screw 0, and remove the positioning pin 0 3) Remove the registration roller @ inlet guide 0.
belt 0.
Figure 4-321 B
Flgure 4-3238
4-33
4) Remove the two screws 0, and remove the
8) Remove the two E-rings @ (resin) and the
two positioning pins 0. 5) Shift the sensor plate @to the rear to remove.
gear 0, and remove the feeding roller 2 from the shaft.
Figure 4-3268
Figure 4-3248
6)
Remove the two E-rings 0. 7) Shift the two feeding roller 2 bushings @ toward the inside, and remove them together with the shaft @.
Figure 4-3258
4-34

CL1000SM

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

CL1000SM

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

COLOR LASER COPIER 1000

COPYRIGHT 0 1997 CANON INC.

CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

COPYRIGHT 0 1997 CANON INC.

CANON CLClLlOO REVlMAY1997 PRlNTEOINJAPAN(IhlPRIhlEAUJAPON)

Glows green when power is turned on.

COPYRIGHT Q 1997 CANON INC.

CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

COPYRIGHT 0 1997 CANON INC.

CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Original exposure block Laser unit

( _ flG=__, Pre-faxing Transfer belt

COPYRIGHT 4 lM7 CANON INC.

CANON CCC1000 REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

; Static Latent Image Formation Block 7 /

COPYRIGHT 0 1997 CANON INC.

CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

B. Static Latent Image Formation Block

Photosensitive Time (t) -

Light area : (exposed to laser)

D. Primary Charging (step 2)

E. Laser Exposure (step

COPYRIGHT 8 1997 CANON INC.

CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Stray-toner collecting electrode

COPYRIGHT Q 1997 CANON INC.

CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPAIME AU JAPON)

Double blanking pulses

CANONCLCIOOO REV.1 MAY1997 PRlNTEDINJAPAN(IMPRIME

Oil applying roller

COPYRIGHT Q 1997 CANON INC.

CANON CLCIOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPAIME AU JAPON)

J. Photosensitive Drum Cleaning

CANONCLClOOOREV.1 MAY1997 PRlNTEOINJAPAN(IMPRIMEAUJAPON)

II. AUXILIARY PROCESS

Transfer belt Figure 2-202

COPYRIGHT (0 1997 CANON INC.

CANON CLClOW REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

COPYRIGHT Q 1997 CANON INC.

CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTEO IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

E. Transfer Belt Cleaning

Transfer belt . cleaning web

3. Dry Electrostatic Photography and Gradation

Document denslty (Do)

COPYRIGHT 8 1997 CANON INC.

CANON CLClMJtl REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

COPYRIGHT Q 1997 CANON INC.

CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Wait time (at 20C)

First copy time (A4/LTR) Continuous copying Copying speed

Multifeeder Paper deck Cassette

Wain scanning direction Sub scanning direction

COPYRIGHT Q 1997 CANON INC.

CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

COPYRIGHT Q 1997 CANON INC.

CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

Noise Ozone Paper Consumables Toner Fixing oil Dimensions

1.223 1.414 2.000 4.000 -

A3 + A4R 84 + B5R B4 + A4R A3 + 84

0.707 0.815 0.865

COPYRIGHT Q 1997 CANON INC.

CANON CLClOOO REV.1 MAY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME

Table l-207 Copying Speed (copies/minute)